Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. notice a door type is specified. To choose commands.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Then. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Edit. On the left side of the Options Bar. and View. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. TIP For example. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. click the command name to start the command. place the cursor over the menu name. and click. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. click Toolbar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. While working in the drawing area. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. For example. 9 In the Type Selector. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Within the drawing area. if you intend to add a door. You use the Type Selector in two ways. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. notice the list of walls that are available. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. First. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. If you select the Door tool. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. 11 Click OK. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . and groups. 3D). schedules. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. walls. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. elevations. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. reports. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. select Views (all). sheets. family category (doors. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. delete. families. click the tab. and group name. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. and rename views. families. windows).

15 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Cancel. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you create a browser organization scheme. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. The browser is dockable. double-click the name. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location.■ ■ To open a view. Do not click. click Wall. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.

In the bottom left corner of the window. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. 18 On the Design Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. In this case. 20 Press TAB. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. When you place the cursor over a component. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. It highlights when the cursor is over it." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. In the Status Bar. The Status Bar also provides information. regarding selected components within a view. in conjunction with Tooltips. click Modify. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name.

■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Windows: From any window. For example. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. You can use this tri-pane.rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Click the Help button. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. click . find a keyword on the Index tab. There are several tools that help you find information. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Training Files. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. press F1 to get help on that dialog box.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. If there is no Help button displayed. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help.

9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. 6 On the View toolbar. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . this is referred to as a crossing selection. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 8 Click in the drawing area. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu.

you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. 14 Enter ZR. called drag controls. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. To modify or add snap increments. and drag the cursor. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. roll the wheel to zoom the view. press and hold CTRL. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). If you do not have a wheel mouse. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. and select the wall. click . click Zoom. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. Without clicking in the dialog. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles. expand Views (all). These are the drag controls.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. on the View toolbar. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. Similar controls. and double-click 2nd Flr. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. Small blue dots. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. When drawing or modifying a building model. display along the ends. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. On a wheel mouse. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. bottoms.

moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . After selecting the element to be moved. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. require two clicks to complete the command. for example. you want to move the table closer to the wall.15 Click and drag the left control. such as Move and Copy. to lengthen the wall. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Some commands. In this case. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Select the plant. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. click the drop-down menu next to . as shown. 23 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions.20 Click next to the lower wall. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. and drag it on top of the table. select the second item in the list. Move. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar.

click Lines. such as the Lines command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. Press ESC twice. Some commands. 26 To end the command. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. click Modify. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. it is good practice to test the constraints. If the grid moves. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. 25 . the wall or column will move with it. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. a curtain wall. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a central service core. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. For example. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. As you develop the building design. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other.

you load any required family type that is not in your project. After the beginning exercises. In practice. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. such as a door or window. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. from the product library. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises.

and click Browse. and elevation views created in the project by the template. sheets. East. These views are customizable: you can rename them. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. and customize the project as necessary. 5 Click OK. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. change their properties. 3 Under Template file. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. and settings. under Create new. In views that display elevation markers. verify the second option is selected. select Project. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. and residential. 7 If necessary. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Creating the Project | 27 .rte. views. In the drawing space in the right pane. and families in your project. you use a template that is provided with the software. with an RVT extension. but contains no geometry. reflected ceiling plan views. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.Creating the Project In this exercise. construction. The project is stored as a single file. locate the Project Browser. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For this project. and delete them. notice four elevation markers. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. Ceiling Plans. NOTE If you create a project without a template. To create the project file. expand Floor Plans. South. duplicate them. schedules. West. The new project opens. levels. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. you design inside the elevation markers. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. click Training Files. you will use the default template. expand Views (all). you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. 2 In the New Project dialog.

Sheets (all). delete. double-click South. As you design and document your building model. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. as well as change their names. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. display in the south elevation. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Save. such as schedules and legends. and click Training Files. 13 In the file window. and duplicate levels. created by the template. Schedules/Quantities. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. content and building model reports. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . verify Project Files (*. 15 For Save as type. You can add. After you modify the two default levels.rvt) is selected. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. view the Save Reminder interval. double-click Metric. and other properties. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. you will want to save your work frequently. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Click Settings menu ➤ Options. You change the names of the 2 default levels. Groups. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. and on the General tab. notice the Legends.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. 14 For File name. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. enter Revit Retail Building. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. will be accessible from the Project Browser. Two level lines. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1.8 Under Floor Plans. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. Families. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. the view you see in the drawing area. heights.

you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. expand Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser. so that when one level moves. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. When you begin designing. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. enter 00 Foundation. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. enter -1800 mm. doors.You learn how the levels are locked. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. and double-click South. enter 0 mm. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. and windows within the building model. enter 01 Entry Level. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. to each other. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. the other levels move and change with it. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels | 29 . 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. or constrained. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

right-click. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. view the Design Bar. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. using a different option. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. If it does not. click Rename. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 19 Click OK. click Level. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. As you move the cursor. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. which should display by default. click . and click OK. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and move it slightly upward. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. This is the Options Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 16 Enter 3750 mm. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. By default. click Level. and enter 02 Level. Next. 14 Click Plan View Types. verify and Make Plan View are selected. and press ESC.Next. you add another level. right-click Level 3. enter 3750 mm. 21 In the Project Browser. and click Basics. not all the tabs are visible. When you add the new level. and then move it up. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line.

as shown. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. If you create a level by copying it. click Modify to end the command. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. or on the Design Bar. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Adding Project Levels | 31 . Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference.25 Click to place the level line. and rename the corresponding views. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 27 Press ESC. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.

specify a start point for the grid line. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. By using the grid to control placement of columns. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. In the following exercise. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. In a later exercise. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. the column height changes as well. click Modify. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. On the Design Bar. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. If you select a level and click its lock. the levels are no longer constrained. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 3 On the Options Bar.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. Notice that by moving the top level. and you can move them independently. click Grid. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. all the levels move. select . so that if the roof elevation changes. When the grid is complete. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. Move the cursor up.

and press ENTER. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. On the Options Bar. for Offset.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. enter 7500 mm. Next. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. Enter A. Click to place the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click . Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 4500 mm. and for Offset. enter 7500 mm. click Grid. and click to place the line.

8 Press ESC. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Dimension. 11 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click Grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. and specify the grid line endpoint. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm.

22 While pressing CTRL. click and drag the blue circular grip up. and press ESC. 15 Starting with grid line A. The pins are hidden. At the left endpoint of the grid line. and select grid line A. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. and press ESC. click . click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 21 Press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. select grid lines C and 3. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. until it is closer to grid line A. 24 Press ESC. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click Modify. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. By pinning these central grid lines.14 On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . 18 On the Design Bar. until it is closer to grid line 5. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. Two pins display on the grid lines. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.

32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 35 Enter 9000 mm. For Place By. for From. and on the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and unlock it. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 36 On the Standard toolbar. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 34 On the Options Bar. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select grid line A. select 01 Entry Level. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. click Structural Column. Next. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click Camera. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. 33 While pressing CTRL. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. click Activate Dimensions. lock it. double-click 01 Entry Level. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. If it is unlocked. 31 Press ESC. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them.■ If necessary. select all of the column grid lines. 27 In the Type Selector. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click Finish. click (Grid Intersection).

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 37 .■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. and click to place the target point of the camera.

45 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all). You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. enter To Building. named 3D View 1 by default.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. “Adding Beams” on page 38. In the Rename View dialog. expand 3D Views. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . displays in bold under 3D Views. and click Rename. Adding Beams In this exercise. 44 Save the drawing.

5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.When you finish adding beams. The view is currently set to Coarse. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 10 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. under Floor Plans. view the icons on the View Control Bar. click Beam. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. double-click 01 Entry Level. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click Finish. 7 On the Options Bar. the icon on the right side of the scale. click Grid. The selected grid lines display as red. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 9 On the Options Bar. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 4 Click Medium. Adding Beams | 39 . 6 In the Type Selector. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 8 While pressing CTRL. select each grid line. 3 Click the Detail Level icon .

12 On the View toolbar. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. right-click. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. press and hold SHIFT. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. and click Select All Instances. select 02 Level. select 06 Roof. 14 Select one of the beams. When you created the columns.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. which only extend to the 5th level.

under Constraints. and if necessary. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. click . double-click To Building. Adding Beams | 41 . right-click. All of the columns display as red. and click Select All Instances. and click OK. 06 Roof. resize the view to see the entire structure. 20 Click Cancel. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 With the column selected. under Instance Parameters.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. select 06 Roof. under 3D Views. for Top Level. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 Press ESC.

and click Hidden line. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. Click Detail Level. “Adding Braces” on page 43. and click Coarse. as lines only. under Elevations. but want to display them in less detail. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . area.

Adding Braces In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC to end the command. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. you create 8 framing elevation views. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces | 43 . verify Attach to Grid is selected. click Framing Elevation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.

press ESC. click Brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 11 Using the same technique. but when placed the braces are placed. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. click to specify the start point of the brace.The associated framing elevation view displays. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. and when the endpoint snap displays. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. After you add the final brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 8 In the Type Selector. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

The height of the roof lowers. enter 18000 mm. and press ENTER.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. Adding Braces | 45 . IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.

14 On the Standard toolbar. enter 10000 mm. as shown in the 3D view below. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. but this time add them from right to left. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. and press ENTER. click twice to restore the original level heights. enter 12000 mm. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. click Activate Dimensions. double-click 00 Foundation. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 19 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 21 Select grid line A.

under 3D Views. 31 Save the drawing. lock it. 24 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. Creating a Foundation | 47 . 29 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. and drag it away from the structure. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. beams. under Floor Plans. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. and roof height. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. grid size. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size.23 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Test connectivity of the columns. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click South. and if necessary. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. double-click 3D. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure.

and press ESC.rfa. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). A warning displays. under Floor Plans. for Level.Before you can add the pile caps. under View Depth. under Extents. and click View Properties. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. for View Range. select Unlimited. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. double-click 00 Foundation. and expand Structural Foundation. and how to load specific families into a project. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. The pile cap has been added in the view. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. The foundation pile cap now displays. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and drag it to the drawing area. In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. After you load the pile cap family. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. expand Families. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. click Edit. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. Click OK twice. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Training Files. In the View Range dialog. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project.

under 3D Views. When the final pile cap is placed. Creating a Foundation | 49 .Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. press ESC. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

“Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. You load new column. and braces that you used to create the building structure. double-click 3D. 3 In the Type Selector. beams. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. All of the columns in the building model display as red. View the round hollow columns in the building model. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. you change the types of the columns. 4 On the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. beam. right-click. and brace families into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select one of the columns. click Training Files.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Select All Instances. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.5CHS. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. click Modify.rvt.

19 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. for Type. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. 9 In the Type Selector. double-click Elevation 1-a. 6 In the Type Selector. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. for d. click . Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. This not the size that you want to use.6x15. right-click. the braces as well as the beams change. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . select the braces in the elevation one by one. 18 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. and click Select All Instances. In the following steps. click Modify. click Edit/New. under Dimensions. 16 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. you change the brace type. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 75 mm.2x101. enter 75 mm. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. and changing its size parameter. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click OK. click Modify. 15 In the Project Browser. but it is the only size of its type currently available.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. The brace type changes. click . You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Brace. 13 In the Name dialog. 17 While pressing CTRL. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm.9. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.

“Adding Floors” on page 52. You are now in the sketch editor. ■ On the Sketch tab. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Lines. In this exercise. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under Floor Plans.rvt. such as roofs. and railings are also created from sketches. and elements in the current view display as gray. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. Adding Floors In this exercise. stairs. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. Some other Revit Architecture elements. To create floors. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Floor. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab.

4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. Move the cursor to the left. as you resize it in the next steps. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. Using a crossing window. click . Do not lock the dimensions. select the top floor line. At the top left corner of the grid. click Dimension. past the first vertical grid line.■ ■ On the Options Bar. Leave this dimension unlocked. Adding Floors | 53 . Do not lock the dimension. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. If the grid changes size. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.

Next. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. select the top floor line. press ENTER. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch to create the floor. using a different sketching technique. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. At the top left corner of the grid. They display on the floor sketch. this is how you would do it. and click the temporary dimension value. and on the Options Bar. Enter 300 mm.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. click Quit Sketch. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. 8 Select the floor. Move the cursor to the right dimension. and change their values to 300 mm. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. on the Design Bar. Select and lock the dimensions. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and then press ESC. click .

and lock the dimensions. click Floor. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and press ESC. double-click 02 Level. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. The 02 Level floor displays. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. Select the three remaining floor lines. 14 On the Design Bar.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click . click Finish Sketch. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors | 55 . dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. On the Sketch tab. On the Options Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. enter 1500mm. and for Offset. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown.

22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 03 Level. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. click . The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click Floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. and a lock icon displays. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Align . 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 On the Options Bar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. under Floor Plans. click Lines.

39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 38 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 37 On the View Control Bar. and enter 4500 mm. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Alternatively. click Edit. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click 01 Entry Level. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. click Finish Sketch. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. select 05 Roof Garden. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 35 On the Design Bar. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. and on the Options Bar. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 57 . under Floor Plans. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. and unlock it. click Model Graphics Style. and click Activate Dimensions. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click {3D}. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 31 In the Project Browser. 40 Select grid line A. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 32 Select the floor. and click Shading with Edges. 33 At the top left corner of the grid.24 On the Design Bar. and lock the edges. and click OK.

double-click 00 Foundation. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 On the Standard toolbar. double-click {3D} to view the grid. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 44 In the Project Browser. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. under Floor Plans. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. under 3D Views. Adding a Roof In this exercise.42 In the Project Browser. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step.

or the perimeter. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. click to place the roof line. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. ■ ■ For Offset. click Training Files. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Click . click Lines. of the roof in a plan view. enter 1800 mm. When a green dashed line displays. You sketch the footprint.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser.To create the roof. and press ENTER. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Roof | 59 . under Floor Plans. double-click 06 Roof.

and lock it. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line.6 Select grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. enter 0 mm. click to place the roof line. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. click (Trim/Extend). Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. and lock it. For Offset. and when the green dashed line displays. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line.

place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them.12 Optionally. click . click Finish Roof. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. under Dimensions. and on the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 61 . click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click .00. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. for Slope Angle. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. 17 Select the roof. enter 4. double-click 06 Roof.

5 In the Type Properties dialog. When you duplicate a type. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . for Spacing. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . 6 In the Name dialog. Under Construction. for Spacing.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. enter Retail Storefront. you add a curtain wall. click Wall. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. enter 2100 mm. click Edit/New. under Floor Plans. for Join Condition. and click OK. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. click 01 Entry Level. enter 1050 mm. the curtain wall resizes with it. for Type. The type is saved in the project. so if you resize the grid. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

click (Trim/Extend). For Offset. 13 On the Design Bar. so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them. select 05 Roof Garden. you can delete the dimension. enter 600 mm. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. click Dimension. and trim each curtain wall segment. and lock the dimensions. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. and move it slightly toward the building interior. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. These dimensions are not in a sketch. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. For Height. 10 When a green dashed line displays. If the grid moves.■ ■ ■ For Level. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. select 01 Entry Level.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Hidden Line. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. Click Model Graphics Style. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. and click Shading with Edges.

and double-click South. 4 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Medium. under Views (all). and click None. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. All the elements in the list are selected. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 5 Under Visibility. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Detail Level. under the element list. Creating an Entrance | 65 . click Training Files. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 6 Under Visibility. click All. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. clear one element to clear all the elements. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

9 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. select Architectural Elevation. as these usually represent internal pilasters. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 7 Click OK. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. 10 Select 1 panel. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . in the Type Selector. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. and click OK. select System Panel: Solid.Do not select Columns. 12 With the panels selected. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

18 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click {3D}. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. under 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 67 . click Detail Level ➤ Medium.16 On the View Control Bar. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. in this case an architectural elevation.

22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. select another mullion to the right. double-click South. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 24 On the Options Bar. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously.20 In the Project Browser. click Add or Remove Segments. and click to select it. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 21 Zoom to the front of the building.

and view the new entrance. and unpin it. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. select One Segment. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. Creating an Entrance | 69 . 34 On the View toolbar. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click . click Modify.27 On the Options Bar. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels.

press TAB until it is selected.36 Zoom in to the first panel. 3rd. and 4th panels. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Using the same process. 38 Press DELETE. remove the mullions from the 2nd. select it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. and unpin it.

double-click 01 Entry Level. select 02 Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 5 Click OK. for Underlay. and click View Properties. 3 Right-click in the view. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.40 Optionally. open the North elevation. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 .rvt. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. under Graphics. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.

and specify a point to complete the callout. 8 Select the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. The cursor changes to a pencil. select the grip closest to the callout head.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Draw a section line. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . and specify a point past grid line D. enter Display Area.9 In the Project Browser. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. 14 Press ESC. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. right-click. and click Flip Section. 16 Select the section box. 13 Select the section line. and click Rename. Move the cursor horizontally to the left.

19 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 30 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. and click OK. Lock both alignments.17 In the Project Browser. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. enter Section Display Area. 21 In the Type Selector. under Ceiling Plans. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the dimension. click Wall. right-click Section 1. Click . and click Rename. click Dimension. 25 Press ESC. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ceiling. select Wall faces. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. click (Align). select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). 26 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Rename View dialog. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. select Finish Face: Exterior. and lock the dimension. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. 27 On the Options Bar. For Loc Line. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click .

click . 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). 37 On the Design Bar. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls.■ Click Click . The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. double-click Section Display Area. 36 Press ESC. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . . 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the walls. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 39 On the View Control Bar. 41 On the Options Bar.

select a grid line. double-click 01 Entry Level. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. for Height Offset From Level. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. On the Options Bar. for Base Offset. and click . for Top/Base. and specify a distance. 47 In the Project Browser. enter 2700 mm. To position the grid. click Attach. on the Tools toolbar. 43 On the Design Bar. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Move. 44 Select the ceiling. under Constraints. under Constraints.42 In the Element Properties dialog. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. and click OK. Select the 02 Level Floor. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. under Ceiling Plans. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. click Modify. enter 2700 mm. and click to select the walls.

58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Edit/New. click (Rotate). 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . for Type. view the ceiling structure. 53 Click OK. for Structure. under Construction. 57 On the Options Bar. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. click Cancel. and click .

78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 60 Press ESC. and press ENTER.59 Click. enter 45. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.

“Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. click Shadows Off. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and then copying it to the 05 Level. 65 Optionally. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. under 3D Views. 63 On the View Control Bar. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Shadows On. double-click To Building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. 64 On the View Control Bar. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 .

click to specify the start point of the reference plane. C. Move the cursor vertically. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Ref Plane. 2.rvt. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. 3 On the View Control Bar. and 3.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and specify a point to create first stair flight. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . click Stairs. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2.

82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 In the Type Selector. The complete stair displays. Move the cursor down. and click to select it.225mm Masonry. including its handrails. and lock the alignment. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. Click . 16 Using the same technique. select Finish Face: Interior. 9 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . 8 On the Options Bar. beyond the end of the stair. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. click Wall. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. click Align. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. and specify a point.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and select the 2nd reference plane. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.

22 On the Standard toolbar. and press DELETE. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. Lock the dimension. select both reference planes. click . and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Because the dimension is constrained. click Dimension. for Prefer. select the dimension value. Click Modify. enter 1200 mm. The stair and walls move to the left. and press ENTER. and press DELETE. 19 Select the dimension. Select the bottom of the stair. Select the interior face of the wall. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and specify a point away from the wall. select Wall faces. 23 While pressing CTRL.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . 21 Select the stair. Select the wall. a warning displays.

Under Constraints.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. 33 On the View toolbar. . Click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 25 In the Type Selector. Click OK. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. click 34 On the View toolbar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. select 05 Roof Garden. press and hold the left mouse button. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select 00 Foundation. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. clear Tag on Placement. 35 Press SHIFT. click Door. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. click Modify. select all 4 walls. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 31 Select the stair. 28 On the Design Bar. but if you view the top level of the building. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. and move the cursor to spin the building model. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. for Base Constraint. for Multistory Top Level. For Top Constraint. 29 While pressing CTRL. click . TIP To flip the door swing. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click . 26 On the Options Bar.

43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. . 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 37 Zoom in to the stairs.Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and lock the alignment. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. 41 On the Tools toolbar. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. double-click 01 Entry Level. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. click Align. and lock the alignments.

55 On the View toolbar. 53 Select the shaft. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click 56 On the View toolbar. ■ For Top Constraint. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. click 51 On the View toolbar. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. under Floor Plans. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. . Under Constraints. . double-click 01 Entry Level. 52 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Up to Level: 06 Roof.49 In the Select Levels dialog. click . select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. By offsetting the base. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . for Base Offset. enter 300 mm. and spin the building so you can see the roof. click .

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 .58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.rvt. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Loc Line. click Modify. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. Enter 1050 mm. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Wall. click Dimension. select Core Face: Interior. double-click 05 Roof Garden.225mm Masonry. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 6 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. Select the dimension value. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. under Graphics. Select the wall. for Underlay. and press ENTER. select 06 Roof. 5 In the Type Selector. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 2 Right-click in the view.

16 In the Go To View dialog. 19 Press ESC. 23 Press ESC. click Lines. and click to place a line. The South elevation displays. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. and click to place a line. click (Align). double-click Elevation: South.11 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor up 6000 mm. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . click Modify. and click to place a line. 20 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 17 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 15 Select the wall. move the cursor up 4500 mm. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. click Edit Profile. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. and then select the right face of the wall. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. and on the Options Bar.

31 Move the cursor to the left. snap to the top of the circle. 32 Click Modify. and click to place it. Select the top right portion of the circle. click Lines. and select it. Press ESC. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.24 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. 27 Press ESC. click (Trim/Extend). Select the short right profile line. click . 29 On the Options Bar. and click (Circle). and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. Select the top right portion of the circle. Select the top horizontal profile line. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. click Lines. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. 25 On the Options Bar.

42 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Options Bar. select the short horizontal line on the right. under Constraints. 44 On the Design Bar. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. and click to place it. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. click Finish Sketch. 40 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. click . click Modify. and select the wall. and press DELETE. 37 On the Design Bar.34 On the Design Bar. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. instead of lengthening the existing edge. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. click the Close button. click . 43 In the Warning dialog. 38 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Error dialog. unlock it. and press DELETE. 35 On the Options Bar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . note that for Top Constraint. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. click Lines. By adding extra height to the wall. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. click Continue. 47 Click Cancel. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. click Modify. 46 In the Element Properties dialog.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. double-click 3D.49 On the Standard toolbar. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to load these components into the project. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. and how to place and adjust them in project views. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. under 3D Views. click to restore the original height of the roof.

click Training Files. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter. as shown.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP After you place the 1st planter. between grid lines C and D. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Component.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. and on the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 View the roof. click Component. 19 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Name dialog. select M_Tree . select the 2 remaining trees. for Type. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. under 3D Views. and press ESC.5 On the Basics tab. 12 Select 1 of the trees. for Plant Height. and in the Type Selector. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. and then click OK twice. click . click Duplicate. enter 1500 mm. select Tree . double-click 01 Entry Level. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.5. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. enter Cornus Florida 1. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 17 Click Apply. under Other. 8 On the View toolbar.5 Meters. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. double-click {3D}.

25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. for Offset. and click to sketch a line. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. click Lines. 26 Using the same method. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . enter 2400 mm. 29 Select the right vertical floor line. ■ ■ For Offset. and click to sketch a line.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to place the line. enter 0 mm. click Floor.

33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. clear Chain. and click to finish the line. 35 Select the line that you just drew. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. click . The completed sidewalk displays. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 31 On the Options Bar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1.30 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click Finish Sketch. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

The circle is divided in half by a line. and on the Options Bar. 39 Select the sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. RPC people are represented by a circle. In plan view. under Constraints. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. 43 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. as it is currently a floor element. 45 Click OK. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. 48 In the Type Selector.Next. create a new type for the sidewalk element. 49 On the Options Bar. for Type. near Column E5. 53 In the Type Selector. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. click . 52 Move the cursor toward the column. enter -250 mm. 42 In the Name dialog. select M_RPC Male: Alex. enter Sidewalk. select Rotate after placement. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk.

61 In the Project Browser. click the car. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. enter -300 mm. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. under Elevations. and click OK.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 60 In the Element Properties dialog. 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. click Camera. When you select a host for a component. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. for Offset. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click West. and on the Options Bar. and click . 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). click Pick Host. Next. select M_RPC Beetle. 57 Press ESC. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. under Constraints. 55 In the Type Selector. 64 Select Cathy.

71 Proceed to the next exercise. 67 Click the sidewalk.65 Click the sidewalk. under 3D Views. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. click Pick Host. and replace them with a service core. double-click To Building. and on the Options Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 66 Select Alex. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . 69 Using the same method. If the sidewalk changes height. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.

so it will cut through the floors of the building. and spin the building. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click Training Files. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. double-click 06 Roof. you delete the entire stairwell. click . After the service core is linked to your project. you must cut another shaft opening around it. and shaft opening.rvt. and press DELETE. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. press SHIFT. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. walls. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. .The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. click 5 On the View toolbar. including the stairs. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. select m_RRB_link. The building service core displays in your drawing. under Floor Plans. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D.rvt. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. click (Align). Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . 13 On the Tools toolbar. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. 9 In the Metric folder. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 11 Click Open. and then select the top horizontal core wall. double-click 01 Entry Level. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. Select Cursor at center. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line.

16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. for Base Offset. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click . click . For Top Constraint. enter 300 mm. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Click OK. Under Constraints. click 24 On the View toolbar. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Finish Sketch. 17 On the Options Bar. select Chain. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. select Up to level: 06 Roof. 18 On the Options Bar.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and open Metric\m_Conference. click Training Files.rvt. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. where it is hosted within a railing family. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. The rendering displays. click Training Files. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. After you modify it. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.rvt.. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. expand Renderings. in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. you add glass railings around the floor edges. and double-click Lounge Perspective. press SHIFT. 3 In the new project. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . and spin the building to get a better view of the core. Notice the glass railing in the foreground.

and Parapet. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. double-click 02 Level. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. expand Families. 12 Select the floor. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. The floor sketch displays.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. click (Split). 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Edit. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 13 On the Options Bar. and select Glass.rvt. under Floor Plans. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click OK.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. press and hold CTRL. and expand Railings. and click to split the floor. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 5 Expand Railing. Handrail only.

click Lines. and click to place it. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. 26 Select grid line D. and lock the alignment. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to draw another line.18 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. click (Align). 25 Select grid line B. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . and click the lock to lock the alignment. click . 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 27 On the Tools toolbar.

click Railing Properties. enter 100 mm. and click OK. click Railing. 33 On the Design Bar.29 On the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.rvt project. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . select Glass. 31 In the Revit dialog. 37 On the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Finish Sketch. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. For Offset. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Lock the dimensions. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Type.

Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Camera. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.39 Click Finish Sketch.

■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 43 Close all project drawings. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

109 . The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. balconies. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. lofty ceilings. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. and a roof garden. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. exterior fire stairs.

NOTE For training purposes. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

section. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to create section and elevation views. you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.

114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. click the current scale. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click 1: 1000. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. enter Vicinity Plan. 14 On the View Control Bar. Next.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 11 Under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. under Floor Plans.

Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 . you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Type Selector. select1:100. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. for Scale. under Floor Plans.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

and click OK. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. double-click South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South East.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. under Elevations. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

14 In the Type Selector. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click Level 1. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Floor Plans. select Section: Building Section.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. for Scale. select 1:100. under Views (all). click Section. ■ Move the cursor down. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 15 On the Options Bar.

and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. click Split Segment. and click to place it. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . Click the midpoint of the section line. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

23 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Section 1. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 24 Select gridline F. click Modify. expand Sections (Building Section). and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt.25 On the Design Bar.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views | 121 . To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.

and specify a point to complete the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. under Floor Plans. select Floor Plan. and select the callout boundary. 3 In the Type Selector. click Callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 4 On the Options Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1. click Modify. select 1:50. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

7 On the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Creating Callout Views | 123 . 9 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.■ Select the middle grip. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.

and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. for Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1:50. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. click Callout. select Detail View: Detail. double-click Section 1. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details). expand Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 125 .16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.

You change the appearance of the section mark head.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. the elevation markers.

The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 4 On the Design Bar. 12 For Section Tag.Filled. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. select the current project. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. click Edit/New. 10 On the floor plan. clear any others. and click OK twice. enter Section Head – Custom. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and can be applied to the section line.rvt. open Metric\Families\Annotations. select the section line. click Load into Project. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Section Tail .Custom. select Custom-Section Head. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Line. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. click Duplicate. and click OK. . Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. for Section Head. and click Open.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Section Tail – Filled. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and click OK. select Section Head . 15 Under Category. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.5mm Square. click Duplicate. 27 Click OK twice. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select 3. 19 Click OK. click Load into Project. On the floor plan. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 12. and click OK. select Custom-Callout Head. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. select the current project. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. clear all others. click Edit/New.5 mm. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 12. For Dimensions ➤ Width. notice the square elevation markers that display. For Line Weight. select Square. for Elevation Tag. scroll to Section Marks.5mm Square. and on the Options Bar. Click OK. 17 Under Category. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select 12. On the floor plan. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and select 3.rfa. click Training Files. and select 2. and click OK. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 22 In the Name dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.

and select 7. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 39 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. 45 For Line Pattern. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click Edit/New. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. for Callout Tag. enter . Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. expand Callout Boundary. 46 Under Category. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 49 Click OK. 36 In the drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . enter 6 mm. scroll down to Callout Boundary. and select 4. 43 Under Category. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Press ESC. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Dash. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.33 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Duplicate. . For Corner Radius. select . select the callout.

Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.rvt. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. under Elevations. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. To accomplish this. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and visual overrides. and apply it to multiple elevation views. masking regions. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. filters. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click East. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. view regions. You learn to create view templates.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. The crop region displays as red. Creating a View Template In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Zoom to Fit. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. 6 On the Project Browser. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Properties. clear Entourage. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 5 On the View Toolbar. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Elevations. under Visibility. right-click East. clear Crop Region Visible. 4 On the Design Bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . under Extents. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Under Visibility.

under Elevations. Callouts. 15 On the View Control bar. levels. and section lines are now hidden in the view. under Elevations. and click Apply View Template. click OK. right-click East. 20 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. double-click North. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK.14 Click OK. 16 In the Project Browser. 18 In the View Templates dialog. and click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and click Create View Template From View. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 17 In the New View Template dialog. elevation markers. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. grids. right-click North. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Apply.

NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Edit. right-click. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents.rvt. and click Properties. select Level Below (Level 4). select Level Below (Level 4).rvt. Click OK twice. for Bottom. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 .22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Penthouse. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Under View Depth. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. for View Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.

select Roof Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Extents. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level. Under View Depth.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. select Level 4. Click OK twice. for Bottom. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof Plan. and click Properties. right-click. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. for View Range.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for View Range. click Finish Sketch. 17 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . select Unlimited. click Edit. click Plan Region. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Move you cursor diagonally. 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Extents. click Region Property. Under View Depth. for Bottom. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Modify. for Level.

18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Views (all). select Walls. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. select Fire Rating. click (New). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. After you apply the filter. the fire rating of the walls. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. in this case. 7 In the Filters dialog. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. expand Floor Plans. under Filters. under Categories. click the Filters tab. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. and double-click Level 1. 5 In the Filters dialog. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. enter Rated Walls. click Edit/New.rvt. and click OK.

select the red color. for Pattern. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 14 In the Color dialog. for Rated Walls. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. click No Override. 17 Using the same method. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.■ ■ Select contains. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. for Color. 10 On the Filter tab. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. click OK. Enter Hr. and click OK. select Solid Fill. under Basic colors. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. under Projection/Surface. 16 Click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Add. and click OK. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 9 Click OK. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Remove. and click OK.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 5 On the View menu. and click Rename. and click OK.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. as shown. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Show Crop Region. right-click. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser.

12 On the Options Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. select Invisible lines. 11 In the Type Selector. click (Rectangle). Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the crop region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 139 .7 On the View menu. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 9 On the View Control Bar.

Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. click Finish Sketch. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. under Floor Plans. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.14 On the Design Bar.Level 1.

select Walls. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Pattern. right-click. click black. click the current scale. 11 Click OK twice. and click Override. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. for Color. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Solid fill. 4 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click OK. right-click. under Visibility. under Pattern Overrides. and click 1: 50. click No Override. and click Rename. click in the Patterns field. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 7 Under Cut.

under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. clear Floors. clear Grids. click Modify. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 12 On the Design Bar.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 .

click Override. for Color. 28 For Color. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. select the sofa. 23 In the Color dialog. click No Override. 21 Under Projection/Surface. and click OK twice. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Projection Lines. for Pattern.20 Right-click. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select a bright green color. 25 Click OK twice. 29 In the Color dialog. select Dash. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click OK. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click a purple color. click By Category Override. By using the previous method to make the selection. under Lines.

and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. right-click.30 On the Design Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. 33 On the View Control Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify. click . click . Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . The hidden crop region is also revealed.

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. select A0 metric. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. how to add views to the sheets. and click View. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. click Sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.rvt. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. click Training Files. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.

For Sheet Number. For Sheet Name. on the Options Bar. 5 When the title block highlights.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . expand Sheets (all). and select the title block. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. enter A101. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.Unnamed. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . enter Site Plan. click Modify. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties).

click Edit. enter 2007-1. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. for Project Address. 2007. MA 12345 12 Click OK. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Status. under Other. For Project Name. click Modify. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.■ Click OK. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 14 Click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. enter For Approval. For Client Name. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. enter J. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Project Number. enter 15 May. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Smith.

Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. and click Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click to place the view. 4 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Elevations A105 . and click OK.rvt. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . select Level 1. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. select the new sheet name. click Modify.Elevations A107 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Sheets (all). Adding Views to Sheets | 149 . and click Save. for Name. enter Floor Plan. select A0 metric. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Layout Plan A104 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you add views to these sheets. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Sections A108 .Stairs In the following exercise. double-click A102 .Floor Plan. and drag it to the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser.Elevations A106 . right-click. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.

8 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 . 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify.The red border around the view no longer displays. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. 6 In the Project Browser.

and click to place it. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. . Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . select 1:5. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. double-click A107 . under Sheets (all). 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click OK. and click to place it. for View Scale. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.Sections. 16 Select title bar.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). click Modify. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and on the Options Bar.

move the cursor over it.Stairs. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1. double-click A108 . 18 Under Floor Plans. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. and press TAB until it highlights. click Modify. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. under Sheets (all). 21 Zoom to the stair callout. zoom in to the grip. under Floor Plans. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.

double-click A107 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 .rvt. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. In order to do this. under Sheets (all). 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. and then make changes and deactivate the view. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Sections.

click Modify. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 Right-click. and press ENTER. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.2 Select the building section view. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Activate View. right-click. enter 16700 mm. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. double-click North. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

rvt. The camera view displays. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Properties. For Sheet Name. You modify the view to hide the view title. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Click OK. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 7 Place the camera as shown. enter T. After you create the sheet. double-click Level 1. 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. select A0 metric. select the new sheet name. right-click. enter Title Sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.

For Far Clip Offset. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . under Sheets (all). select Far Clip Active. 13 In the Project Browser. Under Extents. enter 18000 mm. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. enter100000 mm. For Target Elevation. double-click T .Title Sheet. 12 On the View Control Bar. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. enter 1500 mm. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 14 Under 3D Views.8 On the Options Bar. Under Camera. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. for Eye Elevation. Click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.

15 With the view selected. and then click OK. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. click Size. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Edit/New. Click Apply. and click OK. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. Under Model Crop Size. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. for Height. click Duplicate. 24 Click OK twice. . 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Scale (locked proportions). The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. select No. enter 635 mm. for Show title. 22 In the Name dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.

You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. 159 . such as doors and windows.

click Training Files. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. and click Room and Area. click Room Separation. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.Tagging Objects In this lesson. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Level 1. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. move the cursor to the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).

click Load. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 15 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and select the room tag. and click to place the room and tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Room. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 9 In the Tags dialog.rfa. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. click Modify. click Modify. indicating that it can be edited. click OK.7 On the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. The room tag number displays in blue. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Room. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. enter Entry. 18 On the Design Bar. enter U18-1. and press ENTER. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . and press ENTER. click it.16 Zoom in on the tag number. 17 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag.

164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER. Dining.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Modify. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 21 Click the room text label. enter Kitchen.

click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. The rooms are already placed. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . and click OK. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and moving clockwise. 28 On the Design Bar.Level 2. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 26 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Modify. expand Floor Plans.Level 1.rvt. you learn how to place door and window tags.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand Lines. in the Project Browser. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Room Separation. Model Categories tab. but they need to be tagged.rvt. under Floor Plans. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.

and on the Options Bar. click Modify. clear Leader.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. enter U18-2. for Mark. enter U18-1. and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. and press ENTER. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. under Identify Data. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click (Properties).

Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Door Tags. under Category. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 13 On the Design Bar.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. expand Floor Plans. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. and click OK.rfa. and double-click Level 1. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 In the Tags dialog. select Window. click Training Files.

Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. 5 At the confirmation prompt. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. 26 On the View toolbar. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 27 On the Design Bar. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . select Leader. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag ➤ By Category.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 28 Select Window Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.Level 1. and click OK. click Yes to load a tag. 4 Select a dining room chair. expand Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. click Training Files. 25 Under Floor Plans. and modify the tag placement and display. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom flyout. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .

clear Leader. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and drag it up to form an angled leader. and on the Options Bar. 12 Click the elbow control.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 13 Optionally. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 14 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 11 Select the tag for the table. and drag it above the chair tag. 9 Click Modify.

click Tag All Not Tagged. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. click (Filter Selection). click Modify. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. and on the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.Level 2. and click OK. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 18 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.21 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Furniture Tags. you learn to add schedules. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. and click Modify. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. 22 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Tag: Boxed.

Finally. a schedule that lists every window in the building. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . that is. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule.rvt. in which windows are listed by window type. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.

and click OK. under Category. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 6 Under Available fields. 4 For Name. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and click View. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Comments and click Add. select Windows. enter Building Window Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 9 Click OK. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. click the Fields tab. 7 Using the same method. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

If no open view shows the selected element. click Show. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . NOTE By clicking Show. you are prompted to open one that does. this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser. click Close. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. right-click the schedule. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. for Sorting/Grouping. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. for Sort by. However. under Other. click Edit. and click OK twice. and click View Properties. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. select Type Mark. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. in large building models with many views. and on the Options Bar.

under Other. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H.The window schedule is displayed. under Floor Plans. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. click Edit. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. for Sorting/Grouping. and press ENTER. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. clear Itemize every instance. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . The window type schedule is displayed. double-click Level 2. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. 22 Click OK twice. sorted by type mark. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. and click View Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

you cannot use them to tag objects. click Add to create the new parameter. unlike shared parameters. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. jamb. expand Schedules/Quantities. 5 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. For Discipline. and sill conditions for a window can be found. and double-click Building Window Schedule.rvt. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under. select Construction. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. select Type. click OK. for Name. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. enter Head Detail. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.

under Other. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Window Details. and click Properties. Jamb Detail. click Edit. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. select the following fields. and Sill Detail. right-click Building Window Schedule. and while pressing the left mouse button. click Group. under Available fields. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 In the Element Properties dialog.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. TIP To select all 3 headers. click in the Head Detail header. 12 Click OK twice. for Fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. so that they are listed before Comments. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. select Head Detail.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. for Jamb Detail. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. For example. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . enter 3/A107.Level 1. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. and for Sill Detail. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Verify Schedule building components is selected. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Under Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Head Detail. select the following fields. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. select Doors.Door Schedule. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter 2/A107. click the Fields tab. 4 Click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. under Type Mark A. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. You then hide the column used for the filter. enter Unit 18 .rvt.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. Enter U18 in the third field. Select contains in the second field. enter 1/A107. 6 Under Available fields.

click Modify. select Hidden Field. expand Sheets (all). and drag it to the sheet. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 10 Under Fields. 11 Under Field formatting.Unit 18. select Mark.Door Schedule.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 13 In the Project Browser. and double-click A102 . select Family and Type. 15 On the Design Bar. but is not included as a column in the schedule. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). and click OK. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 9 Click the Formatting tab. click Unit 18 . Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.

click Schedule/Quantities. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. click Modify. and click View. under Floor Plans. under Category. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. 8 Click OK. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Number. 7 To the right of Header text. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click OK. select Rooms. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. right-click in the Design Bar. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 5 Using the same method. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width.rvt. double-click Level 1. and click Add. 19 On the Design Bar. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.

next to Rows. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. For 102. The room Number is U17-9.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. for room 101. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 105. enter Storage. select Corridor. select Storage. For 104. 11 Using the same method. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. 101-106. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 103. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 10 Edit the number to be 101. enter Corridor. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click New. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. enter Building Entry. and press ENTER. for Name. and press ENTER.

click the Lines field. select 9. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click the bright green swatch. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 .■ For 106. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. enter Stair. click Override. click the Color field. you add room separation lines. expand Lines. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. place rooms from a program list. In the Line Graphics dialog. For Weight. and click OK. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and press ENTER. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Under Custom colors. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Floor Plans. under Projection/Surface. In the Lines field. click Room Separation. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. For Room Separation. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and modify room names. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. double-click Level 1.

click Room. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First. draw the horizontal line. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar.

13 For Offset. enter 2400 mm. select 101 Building Entry. 12 On the Options Bar. for Room. for Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . select 102 Storage.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). 10 On the Options Bar.

Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . under Schedules/Quantities. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. and zoom in to the Corridor. under Floor Plans.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. click Modify.

27 In the Schedule Properties dialog.19 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). enter Units. 30 For Key Name. double-click Room Schedule. 23 In the Project Browser. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click Modify. clear Room Bounding. enter As Selected. Floor Finish. click New to add a new row. under Category. under Available fields. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . select Base Finish. under Constraints. and click OK. and for all 3 finishes. 26 Select Schedule keys. 22 On the Design Bar. select Rooms. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). and click OK. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and Wall Finish.

31 Using the same method. for Available fields. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click Check None. click Zoom To Fit. click (Filter Selection). Zoom flyout. right-click Room Schedule. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. 39 On the View toolbar. under Other. for Room Style. select Rooms. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 35 Click OK twice. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. and click Properties. select Units. 36 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. double-click Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. click Room Style. 37 Under U17-8. under Floor Plans. 32 In the Project Browser. click Edit. for Fields. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 41 On the Options Bar.

under Schedules/Quantities. right-click Level 1. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 For Color. at the warning prompt. select Units. under Floor Plans. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Color Scheme field. under Views (all). 9 In the Project Browser. 8 Click OK. select Room Style. 45 In the Project Browser. for Name. click OK. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). For rooms 102 and 105. and apply it to the Level 1 view. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. select Service. 103. click (Duplicate). and click Properties. 5 For Title. click (Properties). select Public.rvt.43 On the Options Bar. and 106. enter Room Type. for Room Style. and click OK. 104. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Identity Data. enter Room Type. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. select Room Type.

18 On the Options Bar. click the value in the Color column. click Color Scheme Legend. clear Visible. and clear Room Separation. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK twice. select Foreground. select the color legend.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click Edit Color Scheme. under Custom color. expand Lines. click Edit. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 In the second row of the table (Public). for Display Color Fill in. 22 In the Color dialog. select blue. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). and click OK. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area.

for Size. under Graphics. enter 5 mm. enter 25 mm. (Properties). 27 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. on the Options Bar. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Under Title Text. for Swatch Width. 24 Click OK.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. and click OK twice. click Edit/New.

click Modify. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. double-click {3D}.29 On the Design Bar. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.

Under Field formatting. select Material: Area.3 While pressing CTRL. 4 In the Type Selector. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. Clear Itemize every instance. select Calculate totals. select Material: Description. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Select Grand totals. 11 Click the Formatting tab. 9 Using the same method. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Family and Type. under Available fields. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. and click OK. and click Add. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.EPDM.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. click Modify. 12 Click OK. select Roofs. under Category. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. click Family and Type. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 5 On the Design Bar. For Then by.

enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog.40 50. click Edit. for Fields. click Material: Cost.80 5. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Click the Formatting tab. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. and click Properties.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. under Available fields. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. and click Properties. 17 Click Calculated Value. 20 Click OK.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. for Name. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click Add. and click OK twice. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 22 For Field formatting. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for the Material: Cost field. 23 In the Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. 24 In the Project Browser. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. enter Estimated Cost. click Estimated Cost. and under Fields. 19 For Formula.

In this lesson. you create a shared parameter file. select Fixed. For Rounding. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. click Estimated Cost. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 28 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise.25 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. either within family components or within the project template. click Training Files. 27 Click Field Format. and reporting the shared parameters. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. for Formatting. You draw a travel path line. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and schedule the total distance of each path. under Fields. For Units. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. select 2 decimal places. tag the line. and are defined and stored in an external file. regardless of category. creating a generic tag to tag the family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you create an exiting plan for the building. adding the shared parameters to a family. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 .

for Name.rvt. for Name. under Groups. for Type of Parameter. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. enter Exiting. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. 11 Click OK.rvt.1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click New. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Training Files. enter Travel Distance. enter Path ID. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. select Length. click Create. click New. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. for File name. 7 Under Parameters. and click Save.txt. 9 Under Parameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.

3 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 11 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. and click OK. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. If you have multiple projects open. click Add. under Dimensions. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . click Family Types. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. for Travel Distance Formula. 8 Select Instance. Click Training Files. following the equals symbol (=). 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. under Parameters.rvt. select Constraints. click Add. 4 In the Family Types dialog. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Shared parameter. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Load into Projects. under Parameters. 7 For Group parameter under. group it under Dimensions. and select Instance. in the Load into Projects dialog. 14 If necessary. and click OK. 12 Click Apply. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and click Select. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. enter Length.

click Training Files. click Label. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 On the Design Bar. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 17 Select Generic Tag. 26 On the Design Bar.rft. select Travel Distance. click Add. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Label. click Select. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter.rft. and click Open.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK 3 times. click Modify. under Parameters. 24 On the Design Bar.

Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. select Path ID. Placing. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window.27 In the drawing window. and press DELETE. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 30 In the Save As dialog. double-click Exiting Plan . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. and click OK. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . 32 On the Load into Projects dialog.rfa. click Load into Projects. 31 On the Design Bar. Placing. After the lines are tagged. for File Name.rvt is selected.Tagging.Tagging. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and move it down. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. under Floor Plans.Level 1.

200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .2 Zoom in to the corridor. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. above the exterior door as shown. click Component. and click in the center of the corridor. select Chain.

8 On the Design Bar. Placing.7 Move the cursor down. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click (Properties). clear Leader. 13 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. and click outside of the building. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. enter 1-1. for Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . click Tag ➤ By Category. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Chain is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select the 2 dashed travel lines. click Component. 17 On the Options Bar.Tagging. 12 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser.Level 2. through the door. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify.

and click. 20 On the Design Bar. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor near the right corner. move the cursor to the left.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the center starting point. click Modify. click Component. 21 On the Design Bar.

33 For Name. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK. (Properties). Placing. 26 Select each of the travel path lines.Tagging. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click in the stair. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 2-1. under Category. enter Level 1 Exit Distance.23 Move the cursor down. 28 While pressing CTRL. 27 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. for Path ID. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 24 On the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK.

click Edit. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. under Other. 43 In the Project Browser. for Filter. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. 36 For Filter by. and under Field formatting. select contains. and click Rename. 40 Click the Formatting tab. while pressing CTRL. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 35 Click the Filter tab. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Under Fields. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter 1-. for Filter by.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Add. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. and click Properties. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. 38 For Sort by. click Training Files. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK twice. under Available fields. in the second field. and click View. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 42 Click OK. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. in the third field. in the first field. select Calculate Totals. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. right-click the Design Bar. 44 In the Project Browser. and in the third field. enter 2-. select Travel Distance. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson.

click C1010145 .Interiors\C10 . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Categories. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Fixed Partitions. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click OK twice. 4 Under Available fields. click the Value field.2 In the New Schedules dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 . select the following fields.Partitions . click the Fields tab. and click the browse button. expand C .Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. right-click Generic . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.152 mm. for Assembly Code. and click Properties.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click OK. select Walls.

7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. under Database Name. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click New. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 1 On the File menu. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 9 Under Directories. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson.rvt. click the File Data Source tab. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 6 Click Finish. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click OK in the dialog. click Training Files. select a location for the database file. 8 In the New Database dialog. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click OK to create the database. and click Next. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Create.9 In the schedule. and open the database in Microsoft Access.mdb for Database Name. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 10 When the confirmation displays. under Database. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. enter Revit_Project. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. Additionally. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 10 Close the exercise file.

a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. in addition to the Id column. For example. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 13 Close the exercise file. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. 209 .Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Relocating a Project In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. Relocating a Project | 211 . and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.

The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. and press ENTER. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. you specify the new location of the project. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. In the Name dialog. By entering 10000 mm in this step. Under Constraints. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 8 Select the Level 1 line. 6 Click OK twice. The levels in the project are not shared. click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. enter8 mm Head . 10 On the View menu.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.Shared Elevation. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. By selecting the Level 1 line. select Shared. The south elevation is displayed. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . However. and double-click South. click (Properties). and click OK. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. for Elevation Base. If you did that now. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. expand Views (all). only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. enter 10000 mm. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change.

12 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click North. under Elevations. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. Relocating a Project | 213 . as well as other views of the building model.Shared Elevation. select Level : 8 mm Head .Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line.

In the Type Selector. click Modify. and select Levels 2-4. select Level : 8 mm Head . 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . On the Design Bar. and the Roof Plan level.Shared Elevation. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. the Penthouse level.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL.

Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. expand Views (all). and angular dimensions. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. expand Floor Plans. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. radial. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In this case. In Revit Architecture. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Dimensioning In this lesson. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. and double-click Level 1. permanent dimensions are created automatically.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. You place linear.16 If you want to save your changes. “Dimensioning” on page 215. Dimensioning | 215 . there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. multi-segmented. click File menu ➤ Save As. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. click Dimension. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . By default. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. select it. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. dimensions are aligned. snap to wall centerlines.

5 Move the cursor above the view. 7 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. and click to place the dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. click Modify. The lock displays as locked. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

select the right endpoint of the planter. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. but below the first dimension that you placed. select the right side of the curtain wall. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. and select its left exterior face. above the plan view of the building. 11 Using the same method. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. and select it. for Prefer. select Wall Faces. 17 Move the cursor up. 15 Move the cursor to the right. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 12 13 On the Options Bar. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter.

Place a radial dimension with a Typ. and select it. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. For Prefer. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. Creating Dimensions | 219 . 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. select Wall faces. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Modify.19 On the Basics tab. click Modify. click Dimension. and specify a point to place the dimension. 26 Select the radial dimension. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 21 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 34 Select the horizontal line. verify Wall faces is selected. enter Typ.. click (Properties). 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Prefer. 220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Suffix. click Dimension. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular).28 With the dimension still selected. click Modify. 30 On the Basics tab. on the Options Bar.

36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. 37 On the Basics tab. and click to place the dimension. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. click Modify. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. you select only the wall. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. expand Views (all). and select Widths. select Entire Walls. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. select Wall centerlines. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. expand Floor Plans. Click OK. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . For Pick. select Openings. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Click Options. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. and double-click Level 3.

in some cases. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. click Modify. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For example. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. and click to place the automatic dimension string. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . When you place dimensions. for a multi-segmented dimension. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Level 1. However. expand Floor Plans. 7 On the Basics tab. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise.

and select it. select the right edge of the planter. click Dimension. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. select Individual References.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. and click to place the dimension. 7 Using the same method. For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . verify Wall centerlines is selected. move the cursor down.

11 Move the cursor down. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . and specify a point to place the dimension. select the bottom right endpoint.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 10 Using the same method. and select it. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted.

and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Wall centerlines. and when the wall centerline highlights. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 13 On the Options Bar. select it.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. click Dimension. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. for Prefer. and drag the dimension down the wall. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. 18 Press and hold SHIFT.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. After you create the new family type.19 Release SHIFT. 20 Release SHIFT. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . 22 On the Basics tab. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. click Modify. and using the same methods. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style.

for Text Size. enter Office Standard. enter 3. 2 Click (Properties). For Text Font. and select the lower dimension. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click OK.dimension tick mark. 5 In the Name dialog. select Arrow 30 Degree. text font. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate.2 mm. Under Text. select CityBlueprint. click Edit/New.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Tick Mark. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

and select the bottom dimension. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select another font. ■ Click OK twice. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. click Modify. 10 On the Basics tab.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. click Modify. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. 9 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Basics tab.

You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. create a new angular dimension type. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. and how to add leaders to the text notes. and modify it to use the office standard parameters.11 Using the same method. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 12 Proceed to the next lesson. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. select the angular dimension on the planter. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes.

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. click Text. for Leader. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. but below the upper dimension string. and click and drag to create a text box.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. click (None).rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . zoom to planter near grid line 5.

for Text Size. click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. 11 Under Text. enter EXISTING BUILDING. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 6 mm. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click OK. and click OK. and click . 7 Select the text box. If so. under Graphics.5 In the text box. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. select Arc Leaders. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . 15 On the Design Bar. click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. and enter Planting Bed. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader).Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar.

24 On the Design Bar. click Modify.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Under Graphics. Under Text. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. select Arrow 30 Degree. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Leader Arrowhead. In the Rename dialog. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. and click OK. for Text font. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. click Modify. click Edit/New. select CityBlueprint. enter Standard Notes. Click Rename. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 20 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for New. Click OK twice.

click (Arc). for Leader.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click Text. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. over the Planting Bed text. select Text: Standard Notes. click to place the text box. 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

click File menu ➤ Save As. 32 If you want to save your changes. Wall. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and enter 457 mm Conc.31 Click in the text box.

using detail components to represent materials like lumber. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. 237 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. plywood.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. like a standard door header condition. These components display at the required scale.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. which means that all detail components. In the callout view. Detailing the View In this exercise. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. After you add components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. You load detail components. region objects. you trace over the building model geometry. They are also view specific. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. as well as detail lines. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. add detail components. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In order to detail from the building model.rvt. you detail the view of the roof edge. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. and insulation objects. click Training Files.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the drawing area. and click Open. enter 406. click Duplicate. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 13 In the Name dialog.rfa. click . Exact location is not important. select Corrugated Metal. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. for Pattern ➤ Detail. and click OK. 8 Delete the component. click Detail Component. select As underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 17 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 In the alert dialog. click Training Files. click Edit/New. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.5mm. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 15 For Spacing. click Repeating Detail. The roof overhang detail displays. 16 Click OK twice. double-click the detail callout head. Detailing the View | 239 . Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar.

and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 19 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Detail Component. click (Move). click Load.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. and press DELETE. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Modify. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. Because you still have several components to load. 31 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 In the Type Selector. 30 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Detailing the View | 241 . 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. click OK. click Training Files. 34 In the Type Selector. 32 To properly orient the component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rfa. and place it in the detail view as shown.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click Detail Component. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Open. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. and click Open. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components.

The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing .Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. click Insulation. and click Modify. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. 38 Click Modify. 39 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 On the Options Bar.

click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. select to near side. 43 Click Modify. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. click Detail Component. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. ■ Click Modify. 46 In the Type Selector. as shown. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Detailing the View | 243 . enter 140mm. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.

rvt. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . as shown.48 In the Type Selector. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. they are view specific. 52 Click Modify. Like detail components. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select Thin Lines. 2 In the Type Selector. meaning they display only in this view. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add lines to your detail. 4 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. click Detail Lines. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar.

enter 10mm. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. For Offset. as shown. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. enter 10mm. as shown. For Offset. Adding Detail Lines | 245 .Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Thin Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar.

15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. select Chain.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. select Thin Lines. 18 In the Type Selector. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown. as shown. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. click (Draw). and clear Chain.

24 On the View Control Bar. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Properties. and click OK. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 26 In the Type Selector. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 22 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. enter 10mm. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select the Penthouse level line. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select Vapor Barrier. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . When you turn the display model off. click Detail Lines. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. For Offset.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and press ENTER. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Do not display. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. right-click. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 32 Click Modify. select M_Break Line. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add text notes to complete the detail. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Text.rvt. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 7 Select the dimension line. click Dimension. for Text ➤ Suffix. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. enter Typ.2 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes | 249 . Enter the text. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 Click Modify. and click (Properties). click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.

10 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. right-click. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and click Rename. click Roof Overhang Detail.rvt.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. select a text note. and save the exercise file. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. click Select All Instances. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and selecting the chain. right-click. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. select all the coping linework. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. (Filter Selection). while pressing CTRL. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and press DELETE. pressing TAB. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing .Keynotes. 7 Click Modify. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. on the Options Bar. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. Creating Detail Components In this exercise.

14 Click Modify. 21 To place the component. 18 In the Save As dialog. 25 In the Filter dialog. The original linework remains selected. click . and click Save. and the component can be placed in the detail. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. 15 Use a window to select all linework. double-click it in the Project Browser. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. clear Detail Items. 16 Click Modify. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. for File name. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog.Keynotes view is not the open view. and click OK. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. click Detail Component. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. 23 Using a window.rft. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . enter Roof Edge. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 22 Click Modify. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click Load into Projects. Creating Detail Components | 251 . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. While pressing SHIFT. select the coping. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 24 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector.

28 On the Options Bar. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 63mm Rigid Insulation.26 Press DELETE. In the Keynotes dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. you place keynotes on objects. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the alert dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.rvt. and click Open. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.rfa.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge.B5. click Load. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. delete the underlying linework. click Training Files. and click Open. Click to place the leader arm. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Keynote ➤ Element. 30 In the drawing area. click Training Files. click Detail Component. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252.

Adding Keynotes | 253 . Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. use keynote 07645. use keynote 06160.D11.D1.F1. select the metal fascia with drip edge. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.G1. use keynote 09250. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06110. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 06160. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.I1. click in the Value column. click Keynote ➤ Element. For the 50 x 200. For the 50 x 150. use keynote 06110. 19mm Plywood. click Edit/New. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK 3 times.F1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. 6 Click Modify. navigate to 07645. For the metal coping. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog.D11. Roof Edge4.C1. use keynote 06110. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.

select Medium Lines. 17 Keynote the component. for File name. click Detail Component. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. and select the right end point. select the left end point of the reference line. using keynote 07460. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 15 In the Type Selector. navigate to your preferred location. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 18 Save the file.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 6 Lock the line. 5 In the drawing area.14 On the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.20 Ga. 9 On the Design Bar. and click Save. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . You do this in order to keynote the component. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Lines. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254.rft. click Load into Projects. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 4 In the Type Selector.A8. and click Modify. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Open. 22mm Corrugated Steel . select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 8 In the Save As dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

16 Select the component. and m_Light Line Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . 37 Click OK 3 times. and click . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog.A1. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. invisible. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 30 Click Modify. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Click Modify. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. enter EPDM Membrane. click the end points at the top of the roof. and click (Properties). 25 Next. click Detail Component. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.11 Press DELETE. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 31 Select the component. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. 20 Click OK 3 times. 29 In the drawing area. and hidden) used in the view. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Edit/New. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 34 In the Name dialog. 28 In the Type Selector. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Training Files. select m_Light Line Detail Component. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click in the Value column. click Load. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Duplicate. select Medium Line Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. and click Open. click Edit/New.

select Chain. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. and click . click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. click Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and assign it keynote 07260. 48 Using the same method used previously.G1. name the component 50 x 200 Framing.38 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 49 With the component selected. name the component Air Barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . and assign it keynote 06110. 46 Click Modify. against the 3/4" plywood. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 47 Select the component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. (Move). 44 On the Design Bar.A5. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 52 In the Type Selector. 42 Using the same method used previously. and click the lower end at the break line. click Detail Component.

and Vapor Barrier.A4. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. and click . and assign it keynote 07260. name the component Vapor Barrier. 50 x 200 Framing. Air Barrier. 58 Using the method used previously. click Keynote ➤ Element. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. leaving the detail component lines.55 Click Modify. 61 In the drawing area. 60 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.

Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.txt.rvt. The database file opens in a text editor. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.A9. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. select the component.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. name the component Batt Insul. 70 In the drawing area. 67 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. 68 Select the component. and click . 71 Save the file. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.A4. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 3 In the text editor. Enter 07460.rfa. add a keynote for the component.A1. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. click Detail Component. and press ENTER. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and close the text editor. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and press TAB. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter 07463. and assign it keynote 07210. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. select Invisible Lines. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. click Load into Projects. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 69 Using the method used previously. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.. and press TAB. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

These details do not update with changes to the building model. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 13 Click Modify.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 14 Save the file. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. select Absolute. select all the keynotes. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. under Keynote Table. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt.A1. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. you learn how to create a drafted detail. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify. and click OK. click Browse. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. click to place the leader. navigate to 07463. After you create a drafting view. and click to place the note. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click Open. Each keynote displays as a simple number. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. In the Type Selector. under Path Type. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 9 In the drawing area. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. and click OK.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select 1 : 5. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. For Layer/Level Colors. for Scale. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 On the Options Bar. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).dwg. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Rename. click Training Files. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. The detail that you import is in DWG format. select Center-to-center.rvt. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. select Black and white. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. click Callout. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. right-click Drafting 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Reference other view.rvt.

click Rename. 10 In the Rename dialog. 6 Select the callout. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. and click OK.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. delete the existing value. and double-click the callout. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties. click Modify. enter Detail . for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 .No Reference. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 5 Click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. for New. click Edit/New.

so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 18 Save the file. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. The callout is updated with the sheet information.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. verify that the scale is 1 : 5.rvt. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.Elev. double-click A105 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.No Reference). 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. for Name./Sect. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . enter Header @ Sliding Door. “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view./Det. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Edit/New. select the width dimension. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click Filled Region. click Duplicate. 14 Click OK 3 times. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. Draw a rectangle as shown. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 18 While pressing CTRL. 11 In the Name dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. enter Gyp. for Name. click . 19 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. . click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. and enter 20. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wide Lines. Board. click Region Properties. select Gypsum-Plaster. 17 Click Modify. and click OK.

and click above the top of the region as the end point. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Finish Sketch. (Draw). and on the Edit toolbar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 24 Select the mirrored region. click 22 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor up.20 On the Design Bar. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.

click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select Wood . verify that the thickness is 19mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . enter Wood . 33 Click OK 3 times. 30 In the Name dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. .Finish. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Name. click . and select the right edge of the wood region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. in the Type Selector.Finish. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select Medium Lines.25 Click Modify. click (Align). Draw a rectangle as shown. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 On the Design Bar. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Filled Region. and click OK.

46 On the Tools toolbar. click Filled Region. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. and press ENTER. For Offset. sketch the new region as shown. click (Align). select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 42 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. enter 6mm.38 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch.5mm. click .

and click to select the point. click Filled Region. and click to select the point. 56 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).47 Click the reference plane. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . enter 10mm. click (Trim/Extend). Move the cursor left 25mm. For Offset. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 54 On the Tools toolbar. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). click Finish Sketch. Select Chain. Move the cursor right 25mm. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. enter 0. and click to select the point. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. and select the bottom horizontal line. 48 Click Modify. Move the cursor down 305mm. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region.

select the height dimension. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. and right edges of the door panel region. For Offset. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Detail Lines.2mm. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 65 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. 60 Select the left. 58 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. click Load. click Training Files. 62 Select the left detail line. top. 61 Click Modify. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. enter 3mm.rfa. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. enter 76. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. select Medium Lines.

74 Select the expansion bolt.rfa. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 69 Select the bolt. click Detail Lines. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. select Wide Lines. 70 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 76 In the Type Selector. click Load. 71 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 68 Click Modify. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. click Detail Component. use the images as a guide. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 .

(Mirror). click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 84 On the Design Bar. click . 79 In the Type Selector. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.78 On the Design Bar. click . 82 Select the rectangle. 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 80 On the Options Bar. 85 On the Options Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. select Thin Lines.

88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. as shown. select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . 90 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines.87 Click Modify. 89 On the Design Bar.

and press ENTER. enter 3mm. 97 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Lines. click . 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 95 On the Design Bar. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.92 Select the line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. select the length dimension.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click Modify. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown.99 Click Modify. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 102 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 106 Click to place the dimension. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 105 In the drawing area. select M_Break Line.

Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. click to create an arced leader. 110 Select the dimension line. and click to place the text. click Dimension. 115 Select the note. and click Modify. 112 In the Options Bar. click Text. drag the text for the smaller dimension. using the Drag Text grip. 108 In the Type Selector. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. Board. select the gypsum board region on the left. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click (Add Right Arc Leader). 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click Modify. 114 Enter Gyp.5mm Arial. 113 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.107 On the Design Bar.

119 Save the file. 118 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 .117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click Modify to end the command.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications.Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 .

Finishing-Sheets. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. click Training Files. for Number of Leaders. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Hexagon.rvt. enter 1. and double-click East. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Training Files. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.rfa. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Symbol. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.

13 Select the tag. Creating a Note Block | 279 . click (Copy). 12 On the Edit toolbar. for Text. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. on the Options Bar. click (Properties). enter Seal existing doors and insulate.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. under Identity Data. and click above the tag to place a copy.

16 For Tag. and on the Options Bar. and click. 15 For Text. 17 Click OK. 20 Select the tag on the left. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. clear Copy. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click (Properties). click (Mirror). enter B. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.14 With the copy selected. 19 On the toolbar. enter Repair existing door surround. on the Options Bar.

Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. select Tag. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Remove all existing windows. Repair existing door surround. Select Text. under Available fields. for Note block name. select Tag. format. Repair as required. and click OK. enter Exterior Construction Notes. Saw cut existing brick wall. 22 Optionally. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. and moving counter-clockwise. click Modify. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean exterior brick wall. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Creating a Note Block | 281 . and click Add. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. Tuckpoint as required. Create. using the table as a reference. and click Add. for Sort by. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

expand Sheets (all). and for Alignment. enter 6 mm in the second field. expand Schedules/Quantities. 26 Click OK. For Header text. and drag it to the sheet. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. select Exterior Construction Notes. and select Bold. enter Description. 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. enter Mark. for Heading. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. verify Arial in the first field. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. select Center.rvt. 27 In the column header (text). On the Appearance tab. and double-click A103 . 28 In the Project Browser.Elevations. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. 29 In the Project Browser. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text.

rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. for Filter by. 7 In the Project Browser. ■ 4 Click OK. in the first field. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. expand Schedules/Quantities. in the second field. and in the third field. under Available fields. On the Filter tab. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the list title field. select Sheet Number. and drag it to the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter Sheet Index. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Using Drawing Lists | 283 .Title Sheet. and click Add.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Select Sheet Name.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all). for Sort by. select Sheet Index. and click Add. select Sheet Number. enter T. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. The drawing list displays. under Sheets (all). select does not equal. select Sheet Number. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. double-click T . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.

2 In the New Legend View dialog. and door frames. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. On construction documents. enter Typical Symbol Legend. Finally. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. click Modify. and so on). On construction documents. for Name. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click New ➤ Legend. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 9 On the Design Bar. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends.rvt. and click OK. doors. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. door frame schedule. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model.

enter 3mm. for Name. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Edit/New.Filled Level Head .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . click Text.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 10 For Text Size. 9 For Text Font. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. select Arial. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 13 Working from the top down. 6 On the Options bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK twice. enter Legend Text. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click Duplicate.

drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Typical Symbol Legend. double-click A102 . 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. and click to place it. expand Legends. 19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. 18 In the Project Browser.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and double-click A101 . expand Sheets (all). drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. click Typical Symbol Legend. select Viewport : No Titlemark.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 6 On the View Control Bar. click New ➤ Legend. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. and press ENTER. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. For View. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select Medium for Detail Level. click Modify. For Host length. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. 3 For Scale. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. select Section.20 In the Type Selector. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . 5 On the Options Bar. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.rvt. enter 900 mm. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. click Legend Component. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select1 : 50. for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 21 On the Design Bar.

9 On the Design Bar. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 12 In the Type Selector. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Modify. 10 Select the second wall. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and on the Options Bar. for Family.

and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. for Leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.13 On the Options Bar. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add text without a leader. click to add text with a single-segment leader. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 19 Enter the following text. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.

right-click Sheets (all). and drag it to the new sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. drag it onto the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 26 On the Design Bar. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The open drawings are both visible. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. under Floor Plans. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 25 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select Level 4. select 4th Floor Wall Types. under Legends. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. and click New Sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 29 In the project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet.

enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. select the Wall Type 2 component.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the floor plan view. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). Creating a Component Legend | 291 . indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract.35 Select the patio divider wall. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 37 Optionally. select Medium for Detail Level. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. These changes can be due to owner requests. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can create a sequence of revisions. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. contractor inquiries. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 36 On the View Control Bar.

For example. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 2 On the Settings menu. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. In general.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. If Visible is not selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. double-click Level 4. 3 In the Revisions dialog. if the active revision is number 1. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 7 Under Visible. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. under Floor Plans. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . In most instances. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. When you use this option. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 5 For Description. Using the table. If you select By Sheet. or changes in building material availability. enter a date. yet as concise as possible. click Revisions. the revision is locked and issued to the field.rvt. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. When Issued is selected. In this exercise. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.

and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. move the cursor up. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click (Move). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. double-click Level 4. 5 Select the partition. Revision clouds have read-only properties. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 On the Edit toolbar. you make changes to the project floor plan. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. under Floor Plans.rvt. 3 Select the divider.8 Click OK. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. including revision number and revision date.

11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . click Finish Sketch. 8 In the drawing area. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Revision Cloud. click near the partition you moved. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.6 On the Design Bar. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.

for Line Weight. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click OK. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. click the Annotation Objects tab. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click Tag ➤ By Category. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. double-click Level 4. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select 6. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. under Floor Plans.rvt.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.4 On the Options Bar. 10 In the drawing area.rfa. select Leader. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 5 In the Tags dialog. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. Working with Revisions | 297 . In the Tags dialog. click OK. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 6 Click Load. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click to place the tag. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. scroll down to Revision Clouds. double-click A107 . you create a sheet view in your project. under Sheets. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.rvt. click Training Files. click Tags. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. You then issue a revision. You do this by issuing the revision. you need to add one. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 8 In the Tags dialog.Unnamed. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. on which you place a revised view. you prevent further changes to the revision. Because you chose to number by project.

Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You can continue to add revisions. select None for each issued revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. under Add. NOTE After you issue a revision. select Issued. click Revisions. click New. On the Settings menu. 6 In the Revisions dialog. click Revisions. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. you can no longer modify it. and click OK. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. for Visible.

2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.JPG. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . under Sheets.rvt. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.Title Sheet. into a project. text. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. and place it on a sheet. click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T . you learn to import information from other applications. Importing Image Files In this exercise.9 Click OK. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. such as images. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. and spreadsheets.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets.doc text file in another window. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 6 Select the text.5 On the Design Bar. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. click to add text without a leader. click Text. for Leader. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Modify.rvt. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click T . 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.

click Training Files. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click File menu ➤ Print. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.rvt. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.JPG. 10 On the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.JPG. 4 Under Printer. double-click A102 . with the new text box still selected. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 3 In Microsoft Excel. under Sheets. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click Desktop. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.xls. and saved as Fixture Schedule. and click Save.Unit 18. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This step has been completed for you. This process may vary from system to system. enter Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. for Name. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. for File name. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.mdi. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click Modify.

302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The large floor plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. you break up the plan into sections.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. To effectively document this project. called dependent views. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 303 . for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. as well as a large lab building.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

right-click Level 2. select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.Aviary. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. 5 Click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2. and click Rename. for Name. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Training Files. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . under Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. enter Level 2 .

and the model crop is the interior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 .

and click OK. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. enter Level 2 . click (Hide Crop Region). and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2.9 On the View Control Bar. 14 Click in the drawing area. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 15 Select the crop region. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 10 On the Zoom flyout. and on the Zoom flyout. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 18 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View Control Bar. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . click (Hide Crop Region). 20 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify.

310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. and click OK. click OK to accept the default titleblock.Aviary. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . for Name. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click Level 2 . 27 Under Matchline. select Double Dash. enter Level 2 Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. expand Sheets.Unnamed.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 31 In the Project Browser. right-click A101 . 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. for Line Weight. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. under Floor Plans. and drag it onto the sheet. and click Rename. 28 For Line Pattern. select 9. 33 In the Project Browser.

38 On the View tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2. and place the Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Aviary is selected. 39 On the Options Bar. click View Reference. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. for Target view. click Modify. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.Labs dependent view on the sheet.

NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. click (Show Crop Region). 47 On the View Control Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. double-click Level 2 . 46 In the Project Browser. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. under Floor Plans. 44 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 . 41 On the Options Bar.Aviary. click Modify.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. for Target view.

and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. right-click.48 Select the crop region. after modifying the annotation crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click the far right control. 49 If. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . click Zoom To Fit. and click Apply Dependent Views.51 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click (Hide Crop Region). expand Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. 57 On the Zoom flyout. 55 On the Zoom flyout. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 54 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. select all views in the list.

The dependent view opens. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. enter South Elevation . select the Crop Region. for Name. 2 In the Project Browser.Left. expand South Elevation. and click OK. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. The matchline is already placed in the view. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area. right-click South Elevation.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . cropping the view to the aviary. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. enter South Elevation . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Rename. and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 7 On the View Control Bar.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). and drag it toward the center of the view. for Name. 16 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Sheets. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. for Name. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). 13 On the View Control Bar. right-click South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. enter South Elevation. right-click A103 Unnamed. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser.Right. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.

double-click South Elevation.18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. under Elevations. click South Elevation . click Modify. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. and drag it onto the sheet. and drag it onto the sheet. for Target view.Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation.Left. click South Elevation . 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . click View Reference. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 25 On the Options Bar. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 22 On the Design Bar.Right.

for Target view. 30 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 . double-click A103 . 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. select Elevation: South Elevation .Right. click Modify.28 On the Options Bar.South Elevation. under Sheets (all). 31 In the Project Browser.

Right-click the view.NOTE If the view references are not visible. and click Activate View. Select the crop region. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn to create and customize views of building information models. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. how to control fill pattern colors. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. More specifically.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. 323 .

and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. sections. expand Views (all). Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. and double-click East. click Training Files. and three-dimensional (3D) views. you learn how to access different views of the building model. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. expand Elevations. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. 2 In the Project Browser. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. on the Standard toolbar. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.rvt.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. locate the Project Browser. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. including elevation and three-dimensional views. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. You create elevations. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Exploring the Building Model In this exercise.

The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. 7 Click OK. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. scroll down and clear Window Tags. and click Hidden Line. the east elevation. 6 Under Visibility. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. click Model Graphics Style.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The default name of the view is {3D}. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab. click . This change is applied only to the active view. click Visibility/Graphics. Exploring the Building Model | 325 .

16 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. Move the mouse to pan the view. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. right-click {3D}. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. click X to close the view. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click My 3D View.9 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. The view follows the movement of the cursor. and expand 3D Views. click to reorient the view. . under 3D Views. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. expand Views (all). enter My 3D View. You can pan. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. and click Rename. 12 Press and hold CTRL. . zoom.

m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. expand Views (all). Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. and distance from the target. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. click Camera. eye height. After you specify the second point (the view target). 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. outside of the dimension lines. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown in the following illustration. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Cameras define the eye point.

down. 5 On the View menu. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. Move the cursor up. Press and hold the left mouse button. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. click Dynamically Modify View. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and sideways to see how the view changes.

Four views of the model display in the drawing area. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Change the camera position. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . click Tile. height. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Press and hold the left mouse button. 13 On the View menu. and target 12 On the Window menu.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.

330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. right-click 3D View 1. double-click Level 1. 16 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views.

17 In My 3D View. and move it to another location. In the Element Properties dialog. under Camera. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. click to create a new 3D view. 20 On the View Control Bar. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . and click Shading. and click Element Properties. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. right-click. click Model Graphics Style. Click OK. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.

25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. A section box is displayed around the model. select Section Box. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and click OK. under Extents. 24 Click the section box.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A rotation tool is also displayed. as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. 22 On the View menu. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View | 333 . “Creating a Section View” on page 333.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Viewing_Exercise. and maximize this view.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. expand Floor Plans. and rotate the section box around the model. click Section. Creating a Section View In this exercise.

The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. 7 In the Go To View dialog. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. or in the Project Browser. and click Open View. and click Find Referring Views. select the section view. select Floor Plan: Level 1. double-click the section head. 8 Select the section line. 6 In the Project Browser.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. View the section 5 To view the section. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 4 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. right-click.

9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Elevation. 14 On the Design Bar. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. under Floor Plans. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. move the cursor around the building model. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. click Modify. m_Viewing_Exercise. 12 Select the section line. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the change in section depth. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . Notice the change in the view direction.rvt.

and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. under Elevations. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. click Modify.a. Elevation 1 . 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.b. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Elevation 1 . place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. zoom in. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.a by default. and click.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. double-click Level 1. Do not select the arrow. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 5 On the Design Bar.b. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing .

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. floors. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. click Save As. a shade of gray. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. and open Common\c_Showroom. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. In addition. For example. and the insulation color to pink. such as Brick on CMU. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials.rvt. and applies to phasing override materials as well. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. This includes walls. in this case. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. in a compound wall. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. roofs.11 If you want to save your changes. such as the one below. and other families. where each layer is assigned a different material. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

4 Under Cut Pattern. click Materials. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. 2 On the Settings menu. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. 5 In the Color dialog. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. select red.Brick for Name. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. select Masonry . click Materials. and double-click 3D. expand Sections (Section Head .Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser.Brick for Name. expand Views (all). Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu.Level 3.Filled). 3 In the Materials dialog. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and double-click Wall/Floor Join . and click OK twice. click Color. expand Views (all). Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. 9 In the Materials dialog. select Masonry . The surface pattern of the brick is black.

11 In the Color dialog. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . click Color. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. click View Properties. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). select white. 2 On the View menu.10 Under Surface Pattern. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. c_Showroom. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. and click OK twice. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. and double-click Level 1. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

If you create more than one plan region in a file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Solid fill for Name. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. 14 If you want to save your changes. . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Level 2. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 7 In the Color dialog. 12 On the View Control Bar. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. and click OK. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 10 On the Design Bar. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Save As. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. and click OK three times. click Detail Level. and click Fine. By default. click Edit/New. select a shade of gray. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. on the File menu. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. and click Element Properties. right-click.

click Training Files. line type. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model.coincident edges. refer to the online Help for more information.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. line color. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. or pattern. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. and you cannot control their visibility.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. and the view depth plane. click Plan Region. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Plan regions have a single property. expand Views (all).View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. which is similar to the view range for plan views. 3 In the Level 1 view. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. view range. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. the top and bottom clip planes. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. On the Options Bar. click . the south elevation is also displayed. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. expand Floor Plans. click Lines.

7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. the line turns red. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . The plan region displays as a dashed green line. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 9 On the Design Bar. Press ESC to end the command. click Modify. 4 Select the plan region. click Edit for View Range. When you select the plan region. click Finish Sketch. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. top and bottom clip planes. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. under Extents. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. 8 Click Apply. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. right-click. 6 In the View Range dialog. By selecting Parent View’s Level. and click Element Properties.

on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 If you want to save your changes. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Save As.

to place and render decals to create signs. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. 345 . billboards. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views. and posters.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial.

Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. In this exercise. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. After you create the perspective view. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. When you complete these changes. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. the floor. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you select a scene that defines the model environment. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

click Edit for Structure.Cavity Wall . Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. under Name. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.Brick.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click the tab in the context menu. select Masonry . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Under AccuRender.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that Co-house . click Training Files. click Materials. right-click in the Design Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. and click Edit/New. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. under Construction. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. click Wall. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu.Brick. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time.

Plain.200mm. 25 Under Name. for Layer 2. select Carib. under _accurender. 27 On the Design Bar.Running. 24 In the Material Library. select Site . 14 On the Options Bar. select Polished. 23 Under AccuRender. . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 11 Under Name. 18 In the Materials dialog.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 19 Click OK four times. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. click Edit for Structure. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. expand Masonry and click Brick. and click . 26 Click OK twice. expand Metals.Asphalt. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. under Construction. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. Polished and click OK. enter Aluminum. click Modify. click Materials. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 22 In the New Material dialog. click Duplicate. 12 Click OK twice. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. under Name. under Name. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. and click Aluminum. click Edit/New. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. under _accurender.

under Name. click Edit/New. 32 In the Materials dialog. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. click Region Raytrace. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click No. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. under Materials and Finishes. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. and click OK. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . Polished. and then click . 29 On the Options Bar. select the curtain wall mullion again. click . Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. verify that New is selected. 33 Click OK three times.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. select Aluminum. floor. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. select Exterior under Type. click in the Material field. 35 Move the cursor over the building model.

350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you place two different types of trees on the building site. 38 On the Design Bar. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. floor. producing a photorealistic effect. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. Cnst. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model.rvt. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). m_Cohouse. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 1st Flr. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. In a later exercise.

and click to place a tree. and click Site Component. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. select any of the deciduous trees. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Create a new type of tree. select M_Tree . 4 In the Type Selector. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . click Site Component. and click . and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. right-click in the Design Bar.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. 7 In the Type Selector. and click Site. click Modify.9 Meters. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

10 In the Name dialog. click in the Value field for Plant Name. under Other. and click OK. select Oak. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . as shown in the following illustration. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. click Duplicate. select Black Oak for Type Comments. and click OK. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Black. enter Black Oak. 12 In the Plant Library. and click OK twice. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. under Identity Data. 15 Under Other. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. expand Trees and Shrubs. and then click display the Plant Library. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. m_Cohouse. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Under Name. and click Deciduous. click Edit/New.rvt. and place two black oak trees.8 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. under accurender.

Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. Cnst. view open. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. The new perspective view is displayed. Creating a Perspective View | 353 .Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Show Camera. expand 3D Views. view. Cnst. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. lighting. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse.rvt. and environment settings that you use to render the view. right-click 3D View 1. date.7 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. place. you select a scene and specify time. double-click Exterior. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. enter Exterior. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK.

356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click the Solar Angles tab. 7 Under Date. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. click Settings. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and click Sun. Time. under Scene Settings.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 6 Select By Date. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 8 Under Time.

Rye. under Scene Settings. click . This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. under Background Color. click Site. click Environment. select Good for Quality. 11 Scroll down. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 21 Click OK twice. 13 Enter .) 14 Click OK. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. click Image Size. under _accurender.20 for Cloudiness. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. select Ground Plane.9 Click the Place tab. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 20 In the Name list. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. select Autumn for Plant Season. 16 In the Environment dialog. Dark. 10 Click in the Cities list. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. and click OK. click No. USA. 12 Click the Settings Tab. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. The Ground Plane tab displays. and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. and enter bo. click Raytrace. 23 Under Raytrace Settings.00 (many clouds. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . 17 Under Advanced. click Capture Rendering. MA. 27 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Material. 19 In the Material Library. select Grass. and select Boston.

expand Renderings. To create the rendered scene. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. m_Cohouse. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved.rvt. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. Cnst. define the view and render scene settings. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. on the File menu. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. click Save As. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.30 On the Design Bar. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. expand Floor Plans. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding RPC People In this exercise. and double-click 2nd Flr.

7 Repeat steps 4 . and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). click Component. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. select Rotate after placement. 5 On the Options Bar.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. Adding RPC People | 359 . 4 In the Type Selector.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Camera.rvt. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.

3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. Cnst. The interior perspective is displayed.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. double-click 2nd Flr. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 .

enter 229 mm for Width. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. click the dimensions for Size. right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under Size. and click Rename. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. enter 178 mm for Height. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

14 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View menu. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.9 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. and click OK. Grips are displayed on the section box. click Modify. under Extents. 11 On the View menu. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. click View Properties. A section box is displayed around the building model. and select the section box. click to display the 3D view of the building model. enter Interior. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . and click OK.

under Scene Settings. click Environment. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. 11 Click in the Cities list. 8 Under Date. you reduce the rendering time. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and click Sun. USA. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and select Boston. 4 Under Type. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 14 Click Save. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. click the Solar Angles tab. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select New. Time. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 9 Under Time. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 17 In the Environment dialog. 12 Scroll down. you create a render scene to specify the time. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. place. By limiting the geometry. select Interior. click Settings. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. under Scene Settings. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. on the Main tab. 7 Select By Date. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and enter bo. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and environment settings used to render the view. date. m_Cohouse. and click Save. click OK. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. under Background Color. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 10 Click the Place tab. under 3D Views. 13 Click the Settings tab. MA.

such as windows and doors. select Grass. click Site. Curtain Wall 1). 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. Rye. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. You can select families with transparent materials. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. The Ground Plane tab displays. click OK. select {3D}. under 3D Views. select Ground Plane. double-click {3D}. click Radiate. 21 In the Name list. 19 Click Material. under accurender. 5 On the Design Bar. select Summer for Plant Season. under Use View’s Section Box. as daylight sources. double-click Interior. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. and click OK. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.rvt. Dark. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. 20 In the Material Library. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 22 Click OK twice. 24 Under Scene Settings. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Daylights. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse.18 Under Advanced. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 .

. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. 8 On the Options Bar. click Save As. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Raytrace. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 Close the exercise file. When radiate completes. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution.The radiosity process. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. begins. which can take several minutes. the following rendered view is displayed. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.

you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you must select or define a scene. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. or section view. click Training Files. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . In a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you prefer to use Metric values. and ends in the far corner of the living room. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. proceeds through the dining room. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. elevation. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames.rvt. The walkthrough path is a spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and change unit formats as desired. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option.

or the first key frame. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. click Walkthrough. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. of the walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. on the Options Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. click . 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Views (all).Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. and double-click 1st Floor. and click the tab in the context menu. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point. expand Walkthroughs.

12 On the View menu. click Edit Walkthrough.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. verify Field of view is selected. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and click OK. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . 11 Under Change. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. select the crop boundary. and select the crop boundary. If it is not. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 14 Click . 13 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar.

and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 16 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. double-click 1st Floor. enter 1 for Frame. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.rvt. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The walkthrough plays. click Edit Walkthrough. press ESC.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click . 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents. 17 Click . proceed to the next exercise. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. and click OK. clear Far Clip Active.

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. select Path for Controls.

and then click to play the walkthrough. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Walkthrough 1. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded. c_Townhouse. When you export the walkthrough. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.7 Click the third key frame position. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 In the Save As dialog. select <Shading> for Display mode. 4 Under Format. If you are unsure of what option to use. or with AccuRender raytracing. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. hidden line. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. shaded with edges. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. 1 On the File menu. specify 15 for Frames per Second. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. The AVI is recorded. click Edit Walkthrough. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Walkthroughs. 3 Under Output Length.rvt. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. and click Save.

7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 8 If you want to save this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. on the File menu. reducing the size of the image. click Save As. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. specifying the number of frames.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. In this tutorial. 375 . You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically.

A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.Courtyard View In this exercise. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. and double-click 01 Entry. expand Views (all).rvt.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. click Camera. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. as shown. click Training Files. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A 3D view is created. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Solar Study . A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.

Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Rename. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click to reorient the view. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog.4 On the View toolbar. 10 On the File menu. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. right-click 3D View 1. click Save As. you create a section cutaway view. expand 3D Views. and save the exercise file with a unique name. if necessary. click Modify. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view.Courtyard View. enter Solar Study . as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.

7 In the Project Browser. and click OK.3 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. to reorient the view. 6 To view the section. click 10 On the View toolbar. click Modify. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 5 On the Design Bar. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Rename. double-click the section head. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Section. right-click Section 1. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click . 8 In the Rename View dialog.

and click Rename. then Fine. Typical plan views. then select Medium. right-click {3D}. and click OK. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. including the house.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. as shown. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. and click OK. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. and under Orient to a View. you create a plan cutaway view. click Callout. 13 On the Design Bar. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. In some cases. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. clear Section Boxes. do not display many elements in 3D. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. to expand the dialog. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. as shown. click Modify. On the Annotation Categories tab. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Rename View dialog.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 To hide the section box. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. 18 On the File menu. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Save. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway.

14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click Rename. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and under Orient to a View. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click . and click OK.4 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. to reorient the view. click 8 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown.

19 In the Rename View dialog. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .15 Select the Roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under 3D Views. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Save. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. under 3D Views. 20 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu. right-click {3D}. and click Rename. and click OK. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. so you can see into the building from the top. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 18 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 .Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

expand 3D Views. Click the Single-Day tab. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 10 Under Place. USA is selected. Creating Solar Studies . and double-click Solar Study . For the Multi-Day solar study. .Boston. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. leave the slider at 50. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 3 Select Cast Shadows.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. For this study. 9 In the Name dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. MA.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site.Courtyard View. date. you specify the location. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. and click Duplicate. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. expand Views (all). as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. You can create a still. CA. 2 On the View Control Bar. or multi-day solar study. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. click .Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. date range. for City. and click OK. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . and click OK. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. single-day. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and time. select Los Angeles. and time range. enter Summer Solstice. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. click . For the Single-Day solar study. USA. you specify the location. Los Angeles.

“Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. on the Single-Day tab. Under Frame. enter 10 and press ENTER. select June 22. 2006. click . click To display the next key frame. under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. . Los Angeles. click . verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. and click OK. 2006. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. ■ For Time Interval. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Save. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Los Angeles. enter 20 and press ENTER. select Winter Solstice. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. confirm that Summer Solstice.Courtyard View is currently displayed. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. for Date. 6 On the View Control Bar. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . Clear Ground Plane at Level. under Frame. and click Duplicate. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles is selected. 19 On the File menu. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 On the Options Bar.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 In this case. 16 In the Name dialog. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 7 On the Options Bar. For Time Range. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. select December 22. click OK. click OK. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. enter Winter Solstice. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

Click outside of the text box to end the command. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. double-click 01 Entry. Click and enter Dining. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Los Angeles.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. and click OK. The solar study animation plays. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . under Floor Plans. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click . click To play the animation from start to finish. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Summer Solstice. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.■ To display the next sequential frame. on the Single-Day tab. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click Text. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. . click . under Sun and Shadows Settings. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. approximately as shown. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson.

Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. select Summer Solstice. 11 To display the section box. click . select Section Boxes. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. and click OK. expand 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as shown. on the Single-Day tab. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. click Lines. Los Angeles.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar.

For File name. verify that the value is set to 15. enter 450 in the first field (width). if necessary. Under Format. 15 To hide the section box. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. For Frames per second. select the section box. and enter 5 to 50. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select AVI Files. For Save as type.Los Angeles. for Model Graphics Style. Under Output Length. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. To maintain the proportions of the frame. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For Dimensions. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. 14 Click outside of the section box. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area.12 In the drawing area. as shown. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select Frame range. and click OK.

Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . 2 On the View Control Bar. click OK. Under Output Length. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. Under Format. and click OK. or frame. 20 On the File menu. For File name. click . The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. 18 In the Save As dialog. such as JPEG. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. for Model Graphics Style. you open each image. For Frames per second. 8 In the Save As dialog. In this example. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. To view the animation. BMP. TIFF. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. verify that the value is set to 15. on the Single-Day tab. click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select PNG. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. NOTE When you export to PNG. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. or any single-frame format. select Winter Solstice. Los Angeles. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. or GIF. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. click Save. of the animation separately.Los Angeles. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and enter 5 to 10. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For Dimensions. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. depending on the Frame Range. enter 450 in the first field (width). verify that Hidden Line is selected. for Compressor. select Frame range.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. For Save as type.

click Save.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. under 3D Views.9 On the File menu. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.

and on the View Control Bar.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 5 Select the roof. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.

USA. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. and click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . and click OK. for Compressor. under Sun and Shadows Settings. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. For Time. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Time Interval. 18 On the File menu. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. and click OK. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar.Week Interval. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click the Multi-Day tab. 12 In the Name dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click Duplicate. Click the Desktop icon.Boston. clear Section Boxes. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. for File name enter 2pm . specify 2:00 pm. In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. MA.Los Angeles .Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . select Full Frames (Uncompressed). click Save. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 17 On the View Control Bar. select One week. click OK. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and click Save. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . click . you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. and click OK. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. click Apply.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. For example. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. click . click the Still tab. 11 Under Date and Time. 9 Under Date and Time. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. select Summer Solstice. Orienting to True North | 391 . Then. specify 11:00 AM for time. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and select Winter Solstice. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. In this exercise. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. on the Still tab.

click OK. On the Options Bar. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. and select View Properties. and select Winter Solstice. for Orientation. under Graphics. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. and click OK.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. in the Angle from Project to True North field. In the Element Properties dialog. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 13 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. Notice that the project rotates in the view. click . and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. click OK. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select True North.

For Save as type. under 3D Views. verify that AVI Files is selected. select Summer Solstice. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 21 On the View Control Bar. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . click the Still tab. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. and click Apply. for File name.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. and click OK. Orienting to True North | 393 . 19 In the Project Browser. click Summer Solstice. click the Single-Day tab. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. including the angle from True North. click OK. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. In the Save As dialog. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. are saved with the project. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh.

for Compressor. In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the File menu. 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. select Draft (75 dpi). you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. under 3D Views. On the Options Bar. click GO. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. 28 Once you are finished with the study. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.■ Under Format. select Project North. click Raytrace. for Resolution. Since a rendered image is temporary. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. 2 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. click Save. Rendered views do not have this limitation.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. for Orientation. and exporting it as a JPEG image. Click the Desktop icon. for Dimensions. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. and click Save. capturing it. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. Right-click in the drawing area. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. and select View Properties. In this exercise. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Graphics. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. double-click 01 Entry. and click OK. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. enter 600 in the first field. and click OK. for Scene.

under Renderings. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. In the Project Browser. for Resolution. click Capture Rendering. 7 Review some captured images of the building.■ ■ On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. and click Save. select Presentation (300 dpi). In the Save As dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . The scene is rendered in high resolution. select JPEG. click Export Image. click GO. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. for Save as Type. click Save.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

type. Advanced Model Graphics. an outside reviewer. a consultant. and Section Boxes. there are several options for expressing the architecture. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique." In Revit Architecture. the Linework Tool. elevations. and details. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. sections. length. you explore the stylistic approach." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. For the realistic approach. or the client. In this tutorial. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. In this series of exercises. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . To express texture beyond material specifics.

building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Using the pre-built building model. Co-house.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click 2nd Flr. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. expand Views (all). and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. expand Floor Plans. you create a copy of the plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

UP Text. Up Arrow. exit the menu. elevations. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. under Floor Plans.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Notice that no annotations display in this view. 10 On the File menu. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. this represents the view getting smaller. dimensions. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and so on in this view. This turns off the visibility of all tags. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 Under Visibility. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 8 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Save As. and click Rename. Cnst. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . expand the Stairs category. and click OK. sections. click the Annotation Categories tab. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and clear DOWN Text. Down Arrow. click in the drawing area.

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.rvt. USA for City. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 6 Under Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. modify. 8 Select Boston. At that place. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Time and Place. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. Under Shadows Properties. you can create. click the Place tab.11 In the Save As directory. ■ Under Intensity. select By Date. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Within a Project. The higher the number. and click OK. click . The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. and click Advanced Model Graphics. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. click for Place. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. MA.rvt. select Sun and Shadow Settings. double-click it in the Project Browser. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. specify 35 for Shadow. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. on the Still tab. select Cast Shadows. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 Under Settings. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. the darker the shadows.

click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. click Save. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you can enter any city you wish. under Settings. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and select 1st Flr. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Click OK. Cnst. however. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. and click OK. click OK. 17 On the File menu. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. be aware that if you enter a different city. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . clear Ground Plane at Level.NOTE For this step. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

and notice a view title displays. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. select Arch Portrait. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. right-click the Design Bar. and click View. and click to place it. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 4 In the Views dialog. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Add View. click Modify. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

10 In the Element Properties dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 9 On the Options Bar. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View. 12 In the Name dialog. click . Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Edit/New. under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. click OK. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. For this analytique. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click Duplicate. select No for Show Title. enter Presentation. To accomplish this. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan.

and select Chain. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. If necessary. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . 20 On the Options Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. click Filled Region. under Graphics. click Region Properties. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. fill properties. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 22 On the Design Bar. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. click . 17 In the Type Selector. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 25 In the Name dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click Duplicate. and the boundary of the region. When you are finished drawing the chain.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Solid Black. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. click . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. and click OK. select Invisible Lines. click Edit/New. 18 On the Options Bar. for Fill Pattern. click .

scroll down. and click Deactivate View.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Identity Data. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 29 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. click OK. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. click Finish Sketch. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click OK. and click OK. and click View Properties. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Save. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. select Solid Fill. 34 On the File menu.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . right-click South. and clear Elevation Swing. and click Rename. enter Presentation South Elevation. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click in the drawing area. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. under Views (all). scroll up. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. clear Visible. expand the Doors category. 2 In the Project Browser. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click OK. on the Model Categories tab. right-click Copy of South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Visibility/Graphics. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 9 Click OK.rvt. exit the menu. and click OK. click Override. under Pattern Overrides. click in the Walls row. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand Elevations. under Elevations.

and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. select Cast Shadows. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 20 On the File menu. click Save. 12 Under Shadow Properties. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click Duplicate. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. under Settings. select By Date. click OK.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click . Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. Time and Place. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. specify 35 for Shadow. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 Under Intensity. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. By changing the angle of the sun. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

and double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the viewport displays a view title. expand Sheets (all). under Views (all). 3 In the Views dialog.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Presentation. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.

5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. Notice the view title no longer displays. click Modify. select Viewport: Presentation. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.

click Save. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 .8 On the File menu.

3 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select 1: 100 for Scale. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Cnst. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). To accomplish this. To fit correctly in the analytique. double-click 1st Flr. 4 Add the section shown below. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. expand Sections (Callout 1). under Floor Plans. and double-click Section 2. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. click Section. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Section 2 is added to the building model. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view.

12 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. click Modify. and click Rename. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. double-click Presentation Section 2. click the Model Categories tab. enter Presentation Section 2.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Override. 11 In the Rename View dialog. under Pattern Overrides. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2. click in the Walls row. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. under Sections (Callout 1). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 100 for Scale. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. clear Visible. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Callout.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. scroll up. and click OK. under Extents. clear Annotation Crop. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 22 On the Options Bar.17 Under Visibility. expand the Doors category. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the crop boundary. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. click . clear Crop Region Visible. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. 20 Click OK. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. In addition. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. open the Project Browser and. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. specify 35 for Shadow. Click Apply. Under Shadows Properties. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . select Cast Shadows. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.24 On the File menu. Under Intensity. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1).rvt. 2 On the View Control Bar. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. double-click Presentation Section 2. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click Save. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.

Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. under Settings. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click OK. 5 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. click Save. 11 On the File menu. NOTE The line style. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Silhouette Edges. select Directly. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.In the steps that follow. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. was added to this dataset for training purposes. and click OK. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. click . specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. under Silhouette Edges. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Relative to View. select Override Silhouettes. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth.

and click to place the selected view. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. click Add View. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view title no longer displays. under Sheets (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 5 In the Type Selector. click Modify. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. 3 In the Views dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. double-click A105 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Section: Presentation Section 2.

Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). click . 9 On the Edit toolbar. To rotate an object. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Section 2. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Using a clock as a reference. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. and press ENTER. you click to specify the start radius. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation.

under Sheets (all).Presentation.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . the callout rotates 180 degrees. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). After applying the view template to a new section view. 4 In the View Templates dialog. click Save. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click OK. 2 On the View menu. click Modify.rvt. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. click Create View Template from View. double-click Presentation Section 2. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 16 On the File menu.15 On the Design Bar. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. and click OK.

Now. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click OK.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select Presentation. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. and click Activate View. click View Properties. 7 In the Rename View dialog. click Add View. under Sections (Type 1). Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.Presentation. select Viewport: Presentation. under Sections (Type 1). 16 On the View menu. and elevation swings no longer display. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you can simply apply the presentation view template. right-click Section 1. double-click A105 . click Apply View Template. Notice the furniture. 15 Right-click the viewport. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation Section 1. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click Add View to Sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. annotations. lighting fixtures. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . right-click Copy of Section 1.

“Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. In this exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. click Save. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 18 Right-click the viewport. traditional analytiques contain a detail. such as a tracery window or column capital. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 20 On the File menu. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. under Graphics. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .17 In the Element Properties dialog.

After you add the callout. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. enter Presentation Callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. select the callout. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. double-click Section 1.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). double-click Presentation Callout. 6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. and click Rename.

This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. under Extents.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click View Properties.

and click OK. double-click A105 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. select Viewport: Presentation. and move it into the position shown below.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . and click Activate View. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 12 In the Views dialog. click Modify. select Custom for View Scale. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. 17 On the View menu.

under Sections (Callout 1). click Region Properties. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. activate the viewport. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. click Filled Region. In the steps that follow. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. When finished. and click OK. select Solid Black for Type. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. and make adjustments as necessary. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. double-click Presentation Callout. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms.

click . 29 On the Options Bar.Presentation. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . under Sheets (all). Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. double-click A105 . 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.26 On the Project Browser. and click Activate View. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click Filled Region.

under Extents. 31 On the View menu. click View Properties. and click OK.30 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the crop region. select Crop Region Visible. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click Finish Sketch.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click Deactivate View. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. click View Properties. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise.34 On the View menu. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 37 On the File menu. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. and apply shadows to the views. click Save. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. clear Crop Region Visible.

Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Duplicate. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.rvt. Under Intensity. click . and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Under Shadows Properties.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click 1 : 200. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 7 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click the Scale control. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. specify 35 for Shadow. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View menu.

and click Rename. in the list. right-click Isometric 1. under Silhouette Edges. Select Relative to View. and click OK. and click OK. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. Cnst. under 3D Views. 18 On the View menu. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. and click OK. click View Properties. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. select Override Silhouettes. enter Isometric 2. select Section Box. under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. double-click Isometric 2. under Settings. 9 Click OK. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Isometric 1. under 3D Views. Select 1st Flr. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. 13 In the Rename View dialog. Select Ground Plane at Level. right-click Isometric. under Extents. and click OK.

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. right-click Isometric 2. You can use this to rotate the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under 3D Views. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. When you are finished. and click Rename. 23 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. under 3D Views. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. 22 In the Project Browser. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. make a duplicate of the view.20 Select the section box.

Notice the section box no longer displays. enter Isometric 3. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. double-click A105 . Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. and click OK. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. Next. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. select Viewport: Presentation. In such a case. double-click Isometric 3. 34 In the Project Browser. 29 Select the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under 3D Views. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. clear Section Boxes. 31 To hide the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. click Modify on the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.24 In the Rename View dialog. When you are finished. clear Section Boxes. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . and click OK. 26 To hide the section box. double-click Isometric 2. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. either adjust the plane location.

in the Type Selector. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.35 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. 36 In the Project Browser. Notice the filled region partially covers the view.

48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. This will make it easier to draw lines. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . The image below shows the lines redrawn. 47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and on the Options Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. and then click Edit/New. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 38 Select the poche filled region. click Finish Sketch. and click Activate View. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. and click Deactivate View. 42 Click OK twice. click Region Properties. and click OK. 46 In the Element Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Concrete for Type. select Solid Black for Type. 44 Using the drawing tools. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. click Edit. click Lines. 45 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. select Transparent for Background. 43 On the Design Bar.

then you specify the eye direction and range.rvt. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. Cnst. under Floor Plans. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. you create the final view for the analytique. a cutaway perspective view. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .49 On the File menu. double-click 1st Flr.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.The view opens immediately. click . Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Under Intensity. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Shadows Properties. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35 for Shadow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select Cast Shadows. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 .

under Extents. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. select Override Silhouettes. 12 Select the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. under Silhouette Edges.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. A section box now cuts through the building model. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. click View Properties. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Section Box. and click OK.

and click OK. you must specify the actual size of the image. click Size. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Under Model Crop Size. double-click A105 . Because scale does not apply to perspective views. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views.14 Select the crop boundary. clear Section Boxes. under Sheets (all). 18 To hide the crop region. Clear Crop Region Visible. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . under Change. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation.Presentation. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 19 To hide the section box. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. After placing it. enter 165 mm for Width. select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

click Duplicate. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select a font. select the same font as the title. click Edit/New. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. enter Title. click Text. under Text. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify a text size of 40 mm. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter Description. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Edit/New. under Text. click . click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. specify a text size of 6 mm. select Text : Title. 9 In the Name dialog. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.22 On the File menu. click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK.

Annotating the Analytique | 441 . click Save. 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the File menu. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click Modify to end the command. 20 In the Type Selector. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. click . click you created. click Wall by Face. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 16 On the View toolbar. select Core Face: Exterior. verify Basic Wall: Generic . to turn off the mass visibility in the view.15 On the Design Bar.200mm displays. for Loc Line. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 .

click Curtain System. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. 29 Using the same technique. click to view only the walls and roofs. click Create System. 27 Select the left face of the left mass.23 On the View toolbar. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 28 On the Options Bar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.

34 Select the mass face shown below. click Roof by Face. click Wall by Face. and on the Options Bar. and select it. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . click . Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms.30 On the View toolbar. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Create Roof. Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Create System. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. and select the mass face shown below.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. 38 On the View toolbar. click to view the building that you have created. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click Wall by Face.

roofs. specify a point for the camera target. In the far left corner of the building that you created. click in the view. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. to view only the walls. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 .Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. 44 On the View toolbar. as shown. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. The perspective view created by the camera displays. Below the right corner of the view. click Camera.

and select the left curtain system in the view. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. select Center. Under Grid 2 Pattern. for Justification. 46 On the Options Bar. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click the frame to display its grips. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. Click OK. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . click . Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. select Center. click Modify.You may need to resize the view again.

50 Select each roof to display its grips. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. 52 In the Project Browser. and click Cancel to end the command. double-click {3D}. and move the roof edges as shown below. 55 On the View toolbar. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. click . under 3D Views. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . click Door. 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 57 In the Type Selector. 51 Right-click. double-click 3D View 1. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

59 Save and close the drawing. 472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

material set.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. they are still related and come from a single source. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. thus the term family. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. In this tutorial.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. shape. each with a different size. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. 475 .

Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . Standalone families include columns. You also learn about the Family Editor. This makes file management much easier. For example. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. for example. In this lesson. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. floors. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls.rfa extension. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. such as a dome roof. however. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. You can load them into projects. trees. exterior. and roofs are examples of these types of families. and partition wall styles. The basic walls system family.rfa extension. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Using the Family Editor. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Walls. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. but you cannot create new system families. and when and how to use it. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. In addition. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. because there is only one file to track. floors. and furniture. foundation. exceptions to this rule. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. transfer them from one project to another. and roofs. generic. has wall types that define interior. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. while many more are stored in component libraries. There are. Host-based families have components that require hosts.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language.

so they are useful for objects unique to that project. You create in-place families only within the current project. To add a family to your project. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. However. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. and also a standalone furniture family component. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. you learn about the Family Editor. 2 On the File menu. custom wall treatments. it is saved with the project. Load Family command on the File menu. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. you can drag it into the document window. if you change the original family. After the family has been loaded in the project. or 3D. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. elevation. for example. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. such as plan. In the final exercise. and when to use it. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. In this section. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. how to access it. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family.

Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you can double-click any file with an . consider checking the web library and other web resources. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. To start a new family. how to access it. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. navigate to a family file. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. modify it as needed. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. In this case.In this exercise. If you find a close match. if you have exhausted your external resources. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. such as newsgroups. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. it should be available within the Type Selector. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. select the appropriate template. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. open it in the Family Editor. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 5 Finally. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. and click Open. With Revit Architecture open. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. it opens within the Family Editor. Within the Windows® environment. presume it is a bay window that you require. 3 Next. you can click File ➤ Open. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you learn when to use the Family Editor.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. When the family opens. and then load it into the project. and click Open.

You create a furniture family. you create an in-place family. Using the installed templates. When you create an in-place family. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In each lesson. a lighting fixture.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. you learn how to create a different type of component. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. and several annotation families. 479 . not within the Family Editor. In addition. you create it within the project file.

Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. Note that no geometry is created. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. and pin those reference planes. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. line patterns. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. lineweight settings. line colors. if the family includes a host. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. Each sketch is set to a different height. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. To quit the sketch mode. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. If you place the void before you add the solid. Base and Top. continue to incrementally add reference planes. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. it automatically cuts the solid. and test after each step. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. Solids and Voids are sketch based. switch between the different host types. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. materials. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. and Sweep. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. Revolve. and export settings for selected geometry. Blend. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. build geometry. create different host types for testing purposes. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. if required. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. When you are in sketch mode. fill patterns. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines.

You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select both reference planes. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back).Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. and click OK. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important.rft. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. and create one to the right. and create one below. click Ref Plane. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. You have created a new furniture family. The floor plan Ref. and click Open. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. on the Edit toolbar. Level is open. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Using the same method. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. select Metric Furniture. and on the Options Bar. 5 While pressing CTRL. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. click Training Files. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. click to pin the reference planes. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. Adding Reference Planes Next. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. and click OK. .

for Identity Data ➤ Name. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. enter Left. click . and click OK.4 Click Modify. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . on the Options Bar.

top). Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. Front. These behave the same as strong references. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family.7 Using the same method. left. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. The reference allows minor strength snapping. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. the strong reference is always captured first. and on the Options Bar. use Left for the Is Reference value. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. right. select Left. and Back. 1 Select the Left reference plane. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. name the other reference planes Right. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. click . as shown. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. for Other ➤ Is Reference. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. and click OK.

and Back). select Add Parameter. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.3 Using the same method. and click above the planes to place the dimension. enter Length. select Dimensions. for Label. for Name. and press ENTER. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Click Modify. Repeat for the other reference plane. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Click the temporary dimension. enter 300mm. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. Click the temporary dimension. Repeat for the other reference plane. Width. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. 6 Select the dimension line. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. We want drive Length. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. and press ENTER. click Dimension. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 750mm. Front. Click OK. For Group parameter under.

Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension.9 Using the same method. 12 Using the same method. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. dimension the horizontal reference planes. click Dimension. click to place the dimension.

you need to specify the Is Reference values. and press ENTER. name them Base Left.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. Now the reference planes can be used in the family. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. select Not a Reference. for Other ➤ Is Reference. 16 While pressing CTRL. click Ref Plane. and click . 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. Base Front. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. Base Right. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. and Base Back. 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. but do not appear in the project. click the base reference planes. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK.

Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . click Dimension. position the remaining new reference planes. and lock the dimension.19 Using the same method. 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. 20 On the Design Bar.

click Ref Plane. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .22 Using the same method. 26 Select the middle reference plane. Next. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. select Not a Reference. The front view displays. 24 On the Design Bar. elevation. Under Is Reference. under Elevations. and section views. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. 23 In the Project Browser. You can dimension reference planes in plan. Click OK. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. double-click Front. enter Base Bottom. and lock the dimensions. By default. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view.

Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . For Identity Data ➤ Name. Click OK. Under Is Reference. 36 Click Modify. Under Group parameter under. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to place the dimension. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. 32 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. enter Height. 34 Lock the dimension. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. for Label. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. click Dimension. for Name. enter Top. select Dimensions.rfa. Click OK. select Top. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. and save the file as Cabinet. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. on the Options Bar. 37 Select the last dimension added. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. select Add Parameter. 30 With the top reference plane still selected. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ .

enter 2000. for Height. enter 1000. enter 1800.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. for Name. 10 Click Apply. for Width. click Family Types. and dimensions are specified. When a family is loaded in a project. under Floor plans. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Family Types dialog. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. double-click Ref. for Height. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1000. 8 Using the same method. under Family Types. 4 In the Name dialog. parameters. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. each type is represented with selected parameters. for Width. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. Level. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. For Length. 1 In the Project Browser. For Length. 5 Using the same method. enter 800. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. 11 Click OK. 7 Click Apply. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. and click OK. enter 2800. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. but no geometry has been added.

Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. create an extrusion from the plan view. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. In such an instance. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. Level. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. Creating Geometry In this lesson. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. where you can define the plane. under Floor Plans. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. select the geometry. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. double-click Ref. In that case.

When the setup is more complex. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. click . 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. click Finish Sketch.3 On the Options Bar. When the parameters Length and Width change. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. 6 On the Sketch tab. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view.

double-click Front. click (Align). 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. 10 Lock the dimension. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. under Elevations. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser.

19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. Level. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. under View Specific Display. double-click Ref. 20 Click Modify.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. and click OK. double-click Front. 23 Save the file. under Floor Plans. clear Plan/RCP. 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. click . 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Visibility. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Tools toolbar. click . 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane.

and click Apply. 5 On the Options Bar. verify that the Line tool is active. 8 While pressing CTRL. and section views of the family. click Family Types. For the furniture family. Level. 2 While pressing CTRL. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. under Detail Levels. but not in coarse. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. 1 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . select a different family type. elevation. 14 On the View Control Bar. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. The lines display again. 10 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click OK. clear Coarse. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. Click Modify. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. double-click Ref. and click the locks to create the constraint. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. under Floor plans. and click OK. the software automatically creates the correct plan. select both lines and. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. For example. and lock the geometry. When you use 3D geometry. and lock the geometry. on the Options Bar. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. click Visibility. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. By design. elevation. They are view direction specific. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. and section views. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. click Symbolic Lines. 12 In the Family Types dialog. select the symbolic line. The lines are greyed out. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse.

496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Before you save the family.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 5 Save the file. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. set a 3D view of the family current. Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. under 3D views. double-click View 1. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. This opens a predefined 3D view.

12 On the Views toolbar. click (3D). 11 Click Modify. click Load into Projects.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. All the family types you created are listed as options. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. 13 Close all open projects or families. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. click . this view is maintained when the family is opened again. The family is loaded into the new project. 9 In the Project Browser. drag each of the types into the drawing area. under Cabinet. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. Creating a Door Family | 497 . Creating a Door Family In this lesson. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. 10 In the Project Browser. and click to place them. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. If required.

and thickness. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. The door type has a variable height and width. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. height. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door.rft. you draw the plan view components for the new door family.

7 Enter ZF. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . Notice the four tiled views. 6 Maximize the window. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Labelled dimensions. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 5 On the Window menu. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Level. select Doors [projection]. click . 10 On the Options Bar. Floor Plan: Ref. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. and represent the door opening profile. are also displayed.4 On the View menu. part of the door properties. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click Tile. 9 In the Type Selector. click Symbolic Lines.

13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.

19 On the Options Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 17 On the Options Bar. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. select Thickness for Label. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. select Width for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. click Modify.

22 In the Type selector. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. along with the witness line controls. click Symbolic Lines. select Plan Swing [cut]. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. then you specify each end point. and select the command from the menu. you first specify the arc center. 21 On the Design Bar. In the image below. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click . as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. click the down arrow button. 24 Enter SI. When drawing an arc from center and end points.

“Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. enter 50 mm for Depth. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. click Lines. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click . and click OK.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. double-click Left.8 On the Design Bar. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. then click to specify the dimension witness line.

verify that Coarse. under Floor Plans. click Modify and select the dimension. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. select Thickness for Label. 13 On the Options Bar. and Fine are selected. click Visibility. double-click Ref. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . click Modify. Left/Right. Medium. 19 Under Detail Levels. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and When cut in Plan/RCP.12 On the Design Bar. Level. under View Specific Display. and clear Plan/RCP. select Front/Back. 14 In the Project Browser.

18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . for Material. under AccuRender. click Materials. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar.Dark. 6 Click OK. click Duplicate. click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and click OK. select Panel for Subcategory. click 11 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click for Texture. you assign a material to the door leaf. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter Oak Door for Name. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. select Oak Door for Name. for Material. and click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 7 In the Materials dialog. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 5 In the Material Library dialog. 2 In the Materials dialog. click . under Name. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.Red/Stained. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. select Oak Door. click 17 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. click .No Gloss. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views.20 On the Options Bar. 3 In the New Material dialog.

double-click View 1. under 3D Views. under Views (all). View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and select Shading with Edges. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 21 On the View Control Bar. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. 22 Zoom in on a door corner.

you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. and click OK. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Under Other. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. By flexing the new component.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. 27 Click OK. Click Apply. click Family Types. under Family Types. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. In the Family Types dialog. enter 2000 mm for Height. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 24 On the Design Bar. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Name dialog. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. enter 2500 mm for Height. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. 25 In the Family Types dialog. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. Under Other. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it.

click Browse. 5 Under Family Types. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. click New. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. Enter 750 mm for Width. Training Door. click Save. click New ➤ Project. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Defining New Door Types | 509 . enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Click Apply. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. enter 2134 mm for Height. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. click Wall. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog.rte. click Training Files. enter 2100 mm for Height. Enter 925 mm for Width. 7 In the Family Types dialog. 12 On the File menu.4 In the Family Types dialog. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Define the second new door type. 8 Under Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 19 On the Options Bar. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. 11 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. 15 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Project. enter 2000 mm for Height. click New. click Door. click Load. and click Open. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. Define the third new door type. 6 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. and click OK. Training Door.rfa. 17 Under Create new. select it. 20 In the Open dialog.rfa. Enter 1220 mm for Width.

click . 24 On the View Control Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. click Door. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 28 In the Type Selector. 25 On the Design Bar. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown.23 On the View toolbar. 26 In the Type Selector. and select Shading with Edges. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown.

height. Finally. 32 You can close all files without saving. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. You create the window frame. Creating a Door Family. and mullion offset. Creating a Window Family | 511 . default sill height. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and create the window sash as a sweep.30 In the Type Selector. glazing and mullions as extrusions. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. This completes the lesson. and specify values for the window width. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown.

5 Enter ZF. also one of the window properties.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. When you add labels to dimensions. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. The label name. 2 On the File menu. is one of the type parameters. equally spaced vertical mullions. click New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. Height and Default Sill Height. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft. you specify the parameters for the new window family. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. click Training Files. The window type has a variable height and width. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

Enter 1800 mm for Width. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. 4 On the Options Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click . Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 10 Click OK. Snap the cursor to each corner. Click Apply. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Change the height and width values again. This is the starting point for the new window. and click Apply. click Sketch 2D Path. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. This process is called “flexing the model. and click Apply.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Family Types dialog. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. enter 1300 mm for Height. 2 On the Design Bar. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. click Family Types. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. then sketching the sweep profile.

click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. click the Scale control. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. 10 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Sketch Profile. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog. and click Open View. and specify an offset of 50 mm. click Finish Path. click . and select 1:10.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . and click OK. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and select the reference plane. click . select Chain and click . 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. click Modify. click Dimension. 25 Below the red dot. 20 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar.15 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. and select the dimension. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. under Identity Data. select Prefer: Wall faces. 16 On the Options Bar. enter Sash for the Name.

click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. However. the exact dimensions are not critical. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. click Modify. 26 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps.

click Modify. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. as shown. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . TIP After adding the dimension. and specify the dimension value. 30 On the Design Bar.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. select the line you want to move. click Dimension. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame.

click Finish Sweep. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. click Finish Profile. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays. 36 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. click . zoom out until it displays. Next. click the lock to constrain the present value. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. this is the top of the window opening. click the lock to constrain the present value. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. When the lock displays.Modify each dimension if necessary.

and select the option. and double-click View 1. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. under Views (all). Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame.45 mm for Depth. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. and select Lock. double-click Exterior. click Set Work Plane. click Lines. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . 4 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. If necessary. 39 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. and click OK.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. click . Chain of walls or lines. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. and enter . expand 3D Views. 38 In the Project Browser.

520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. ■ ■ Enter .50 mm for Offset. set the following options: Click . and lock icons display on each line. click Finish Sketch. ■ Click . 9 On the Design Bar.

under Elevations. 11 In the Project Browser. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . The window sash extrusion is now complete.10 In the Project Browser. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. double-click Right. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521.

as shown. under Elevations. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. 2 On the Design Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar. click . double-click Right. 522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. enter -12 mm for Depth. 7 On the Design Bar. and select Lock. click Dimension. and click OK. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. click Lines. 16 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.5 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the reference plane. click . click . under Identity Data. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. 15 On the Design Bar.

23 On the Design Bar. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. and click OK. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. under Elevations. sash.18 On the Design Bar. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. After the family is loaded into a project. under Identity Data. View the window model with frame. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog.

Click Apply. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 26 In the Family Types dialog. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. under 3D Views. enter 1500 mm for Height. double-click View 1. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Under Other. For example. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. NOTE After flexing the model.24 In the Project Browser. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Enter 1500 mm for Width.

under Elevations. 4 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. 28 On the Edit toolbar. 2 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. the exact location is not critical. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.27 Click Cancel. click to return the window to its original dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Exterior. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. click Dimension. click Ref Plane.

After adding the dimension. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click Modify. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. as shown. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . as shown.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it.

10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Dimensions. select Dimensions. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Select Instance. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. and click OK. Under Group parameter under.> for Label. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. select <Add parameter. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown... 11 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. enter Mullion Offset for Name. Click OK.9 On the Options Bar.

23 On the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. and click OK. and click . click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . click Modify. As you did before. enter 14 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. click Lines. However. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. select Mullion Offset for Label. under Specify a new Work Plane. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. move the dimension value as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. and enter 350 mm as the new value. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar.14 Click the dimension value. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash.

click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. Move the dimension values as shown. 26 On the Design Bar. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion.After you complete the sketch. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.

select Family parameter. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. select Dimensions. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. Select Type. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. enter Mullion Width for Name. Under Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter> for Label.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. click Modify.

35 In the Family Types dialog. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. and click Apply. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. 33 On the Design Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. click Family Types. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Select the dimension. and on the Options Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. click Finish Sketch. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 40 mm for Mullion Width.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. Remember. This is changed in later steps.

Under Other. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . and click OK.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. click Set Work Plane. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 38 On the Edit toolbar. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. or undoing the same. Enter 1500 mm for Width. evenly spaced. 37 Click Cancel. NOTE After flexing the model. 40 On the Design Bar. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. and aligned with the sash edge. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. In this case. click to return the window to its original dimensions.

43 On the Options Bar. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. click Modify. click Dimension. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. click Dimension. 47 On the Design Bar. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. as shown. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. click . 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Lines. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step.42 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. 45 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Design Bar. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Mullion Width for Label. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label. Select the dimension. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Move the dimension value as shown. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint.50 On the Options Bar. Remember.

55 In the Project Browser. Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. and select the vertical mullions.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. If necessary. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under 3D Views. double-click View 1.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. Under Other. 59 Click Cancel. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . enter 1500 mm for Height. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 57 On the Design Bar. you can still see the window. 58 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Click Apply.

Dark. 3 In the New Material dialog. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. click for Texture. under Elevations. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. and the mullions. the sash. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under AccuRender. you assign materials to the frame. and click OK. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. 9 Select the window frame sweep. No Gloss. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. click to return the window to its original dimensions. 6 In the Materials dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. select Stained. click Materials. click Duplicate. Yellow/. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 5 In the Material Library dialog. 4 In the Materials dialog. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and select Shading with Edges. enter Pine Frame for Name.60 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. sash. double-click Exterior. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Materials dialog. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. click OK. sash. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

10 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display. Medium. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. select Pine Frame for Name. under Graphics. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and Fine are selected. click . under Identity Data. 16 Under Detail Levels. clear the other view options. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . select Edit for Visibility. and Fine are selected. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and click OK. double-click View 1. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. double-click Right. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 20 Select the glass extrusion. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. click OK. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 23 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. verify that Coarse. 13 In the Materials dialog. Medium. click Visibility. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click for Material.

Defining New Window Types In this exercise. “Defining New Window Types” on page 540.25 Zoom in on a window corner. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. mullions. sash. The window frame. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and glass display their assigned materials.

and click Apply. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Defining New Window Types | 541 . and click Apply. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. In the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 3 In the Family Types dialog.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.

8 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1000 mm for Height. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. under Family Types.The window height is doubled. Enter 1250 mm for Height. 7 In the Name dialog. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. click New. and click Apply. and click OK.

11 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 15 On the File menu. Defining New Window Types | 543 . click Load. click to start a new project based on your default template. Click Apply. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width.9 Under Family Types. click Save. Enter 1300 mm for Height. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click New. Click Apply. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.rfa. Click OK. 10 In the Name dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 13 In the Name dialog. Training Window. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. click New. Enter 1500 mm for Height. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 14 In the Family Types dialog. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. click Window. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name.

28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.rfa file. 29 In the Type Selector. click Thin Lines. Notice the detail that displays. 23 On the Design Bar. and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 25 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to the location of your Training Window. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. select it. click Wall. 35 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the View menu. 34 On the View toolbar. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h.20 In the Open dialog. clear Tag on Placement. 27 In the Type Selector. and click Open. click Window.

Solid Revolve. and materials of the subcategories. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Model lines are displayed in every view. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. a parameter drives geometry in a family. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. and section views of a family. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. Solid Blend. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . you plan. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. model lines. This allows you to drive lineweights. For example. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. sketch. Instance parameter means. line colors. Basically. elevation. line patterns. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry.

By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project. you should define different widths for each of the casements. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. Medium and Fine. and Elevation views. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. Section.

3 In the left pane of the New dialog.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. The family template uses a wall as host. and click Open.rft. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . click Training Files. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. The family editor is opened with a new window family. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 1 Close all open projects or families. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. select Metric Window.

4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. for Construction ➤ Structure. 10 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. and on the Options Bar. enter Insertion Edge. under Other. so you model the new opening first. in the Edit toolbar. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. for Structure ➤ Thickness. enter 400. for Name. Under Other. accept the default name.4 Select the wall. click Edit/New. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. click Ref Plane. and click . click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select Defines Origin. and click OK. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. 7 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. click Duplicate. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. Verify that Defines Origin is selected. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. . click . In the Type Selector. select Weak Reference. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. . for Is Reference. select Wall Closure. 9 Click Modify. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane.

select Add Parameter. for Identity Data ➤ Name. For Group parameter under. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. on the Options Bar. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. Next. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. enter 75. and click OK. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Click Modify. select Constraints.10 Select the first reference plane you created. enter Wall Offset Left. click Dimension. for Label. By extending the reference pane. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . 17 Click Modify. for Name. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. 14 Using the same method. dimension the vertical reference planes. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. enter Insertion Depth. for the temporary dimension. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. click Dimension. 19 Select the dimension. and click . 12 Using the same method. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. Click OK. and select Instance. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted.

27 Using the same method. For Group parameter under. The skeleton for the opening is complete. 32 Click Modify. select Add Parameter. enter 100. click Ref Plane. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and press ENTER. on the Options Bar. Click OK. for the temporary dimension. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select Construction. enter 100. click Dimension. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for the temporary dimension. select Wall Offset. enter Wall Offset. 30 On the Design Bar. for Label. 33 Select the new reference plane. on the Options Bar. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. on the Options Bar. Next. enter Wall Offset Top. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. select Construction. and click . 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. 38 Select the dimension. For Group parameter under.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. for Name. for Label. 35 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Wall Offset Top. 28 Select the dimension. and click OK. for Name. select Add Parameter. 25 Select the dimension. Click OK. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. for Identity Data ➤ Name. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. double-click Exterior. for Label.

lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. and click OK.40 Save the file as Casement Window. 2 On the Tools toolbar. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref.rfa. Level. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. select the top edge of the sketch. and lock the alignment. under Specify a new Work Plane. for Name. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Align). Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. 5 On the Options Bar. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. click . 8 Using the same method. and sketch the extrusion as shown. under Floor Plans. select Reference Plane : Sill. click (Plane). Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . Wall Offset Left. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 On the Tools toolbar.

NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. In order to use the voids as a new opening. 12 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. 16 On the Views toolbar. and Left reference planes. and press DELETE. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. double-click Exterior. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown.9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Right. 15 Using the same method. and lock the alignment. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 10 Using the same method. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Also. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. Interior. click (3D). click (Align). and lock the alignment.

18 On the Tools toolbar. click (Cut Geometry). Next. and then select the wall geometry. 20 Using the same method. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 .The opening in the wall is deleted. 19 Select the void. cut the second void from the wall. The first void is cut from the wall.

click Dimension. for the temporary dimension. Click OK. For Wall Offset.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. For Identity Data ➤ Name. For Other ➤ Is Reference. double-click Ref. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. Note that the opening has changed correctly. Click OK. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. Level. click Family Types. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 3 Select the reference plane. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. select Not a Reference. enter 100mm. enter 50mm. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. enter 50mm. 9 Select the reference plane. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. enter Frame Left. under Floor Plans. and click . 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

For Group parameter under. select Not a Reference. enter Frame Right. for Label. enter 100mm. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Add Parameter. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. 14 Select the right dimension. for Label. For Other ➤ Is Reference. for the temporary dimension. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. name it Frame Interior. click Dimension. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. 17 Using the same method. enter Frame Width. 16 Select the left dimension. for Name. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . Click OK. select Frame Width.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. select Construction. Click OK. on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar.

19 Using the same method used previously.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. dimension the planes at 120mm. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension.

on the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the lower dimension. enter 150mm. Click OK. select Construction. name it Frame Top.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. enter Frame Height Bottom. enter Frame Bottom. double-click Exterior. Click OK. select Construction. under Elevations. For Identity Data ➤ Name. select Not a Reference. 27 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. enter Frame Height Top. For Group parameter under. 22 Select the reference plane. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . for Label. select Add Parameter. For Group parameter under. click Dimension. for the temporary dimension. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. Click OK. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. select Add Parameter. for Label. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 30 Select the other dimension. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.

Under Construction. for Height. enter 80mm. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. enter 2000mm. For Wall Offset. Before you model the frame geometry. For Width. 36 Under Family Types. enter 50mm. for Insertion Depth. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. enter 100mm. enter 70mm. enter 100mm. enter 50mm. click New. enter 60mm. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. for Wall Offset Top. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 100mm. 35 In the Name dialog. enter 1500mm. 37 In the Name dialog. 34 Under Family Types. For Frame Height Top. For Frame Width. For Frame Height Bottom. Under Construction. For Frame Width. for Wall Offset Top.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. enter 80mm. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. click New. enter 80mm. for Insertion Depth. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Under Other. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. click Family Types. enter 100mm. For Wall Offset. enter 50mm. For Center Post Width. A family type manages type parameters only. for Frame Depth. Under Dimensions.

for Height. and click OK. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. enter 80mm. one on the right. Under Other. Frame Left. Frame Bottom. For Width. Center Post Left. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click (Align). 42 In the Work Plane dialog. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Frame Top. enter 70mm. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Frame Right. under Specify a new Work Plane. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. 39 Click Apply. Center Post Right. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. 44 On the Options Bar. click (Plane). Frame Bottom. for Frame Depth. click . Right. and click OK. enter 120mm. 43 On the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. 45 On the Tools toolbar. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. Sill. enter 120mm. Under Dimensions. Head. 40 Under Name. For Center Post Width. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. for Name. enter 1400mm. For Frame Height Bottom. enter 1500mm.

under Floor Plans. 57 On the View Control Bar. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. The window frame is complete. clear Plan/RCP. click Finish Sketch. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 56 Click OK twice. and lock the alignment. 52 On the Views toolbar. clear Coarse. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click (3D). double-click Ref. Level. 49 On the Tools toolbar. . Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. and lock the alignment.47 On the Design Bar. 51 Click Modify. 48 In the Project Browser. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. click Edit. Under Detail Levels. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select Frame/Mullion. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display.

and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . under Name. and click Apply. 59 In the Family Types dialog. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. and click OK. under Floor Plans. However. click Family Types. click Scale ➤ 1:10. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. double-click Ref. 3 On the Views toolbar. enter Sash Left Left. For Identity Data ➤ Name.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Level. you model each sash separately. 2 On the View Control Bar.

Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. select Not a Reference. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 18 On the Design Bar. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. Click OK. select Construction. specify each dimension as 50mm. select Add Parameter.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 Using the same method. Click OK. for Label. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. double-click Exterior. enter Sash Bottom. 12 Using the same method. 11 Select the next dimension. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Not a Reference. for Label. under Elevations. on the Options Bar. 16 Select the reference plane. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 9 Select the left dimension. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. select Sash Width. Click OK. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 15 Click Modify. enter Sash Width. For Group parameter under. click Dimension. on the Options Bar.

click Family Types. select both dimensions. select Sash Width. on the Options Bar. for the temporary dimension. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 28 For Name. 30 On the Options Bar. for Sash Width. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. enter 50mm. Specify it as Not a Reference.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. click (Align). Before you model the sash geometry. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. click . extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . 31 On the Tools toolbar. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 25 For Name. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. 23 While pressing CTRL. 21 Using the same method. enter 70mm. 26 Under Construction. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. 27 Click Apply. for Label. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. enter 50mm. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for the temporary dimension. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension.

click (3D). 43 On the Views toolbar. Frame Right. 42 Switch back to the Ref. Sash Top. double-click Ref. 40 Click Modify. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. and lock the alignment. click Edit. Sash Right Right. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Center Post Right. Sash Bottom. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. Level. Sash Right Left. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. and click OK twice. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. under Floor Plans. for Extents ➤ View Range. enter 1500. Frame Bottom. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 37 In the View Range dialog. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. 41 Using the same method. 34 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment.

4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. select the 2 extrusions. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. click the rectangular button on the right side. 6 Using the same method. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . select Frame/Mullion. enter Sash Right. 47 Click OK twice. and click . 5 Click OK 3 times. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. clear Coarse. click Add parameter. 7 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Plan/RCP. for Graphics ➤ Visible. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. Under Detail Levels. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . For Group Parameter under. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. select Construction. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column.44 While pressing CTRL.

double-click Ref. Click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. dimension the Insertion Edge. 10 Under Construction. Level. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 3 Select the reference plane. under Floor Plans. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Not a Reference.Test the family 8 For Name. under Elevations. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. 6 Using one dimension string. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. not aligned to reference planes. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. and name them Glass Axis Right. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. enter Glass Axis. For Other ➤ Is Reference. and click OK. Glass Axis. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. click Dimension. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. double-click Exterior. and Glass Axis Horizontal. and click Apply. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. Glass Axis Left. clear Sash Left. and Frame Interior reference planes. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ .

you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. for Name. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. and click OK. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . click (Plane). create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane.10 For each of the new reference planes. 4 On the Options Bar.

Click OK. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. and the right edge of the sketch. For Group Parameter under. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. enter Glass Length Right.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. select Other. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. click Dimension. dimension the left edge of the sketch. 6 Using one dimension string. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. for Label. 7 Click EQ. click Dimension. 11 Select the dimension line and. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. on the Options Bar. 8 Using the same method. select Add Parameter. 13 Using the same method. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

For Extrusion Start. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. clear Plan/RCP. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click (3D). Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . clear Coarse. 18 Click OK twice. click Edit. Under Detail Levels. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right.0. select Glass. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. enter 10. enter -10.0. 21 On the Views toolbar. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Finish Sketch.14 On the Design Bar. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method.

used to control families in many ways. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions.22 On the View Control Bar. as it will minimize performance hits. Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. you should do it. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. However. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. if you can build your family without using formulas. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters.

2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. under Parameters.(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. click Dimension. for Label. NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . 5' . click Add. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . For Type of Parameter. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane.6. 2' 6" . enter Width Sash Right.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . enter Width Sash Left. 9 In the Family Types dialog. under Floor Plans. 8 . click Family Types. IF ( Length < 55' . select Add Parameter. 3' . Level. <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . enter 1000. 6 Select the dimension.OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . <result-if-true>. for the temporary dimension. B = 3 ) . y = 2). select Dimensions. 8 . select Length.AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . 2'-6". IF ( Length < 45' . 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 3 ) Simple IF . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 8 . 8' ) ) ) IF . 4 Click Modify. The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. 8 On the Design Bar. This would overconstrain the family. double-click Ref. on the Options Bar. 3'-0" ) Simple IF . 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. For Group parameter under. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.

■ Click Apply. and Center Post Width. enter if(Sash Right.2 * Sash Width). select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. The value is greyed out.Width Sash Left) . select Dimensions. enter if(Sash Left. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. Click OK. The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. enter if(Sash Right. enter 400.2 * Sash Width).■ ■ For Group Parameter under. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. the new value is 560. Width Sash Left). Frame Width. Height . the new value is 880.(Frame Width * 2) .Frame Height Bottom .Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. enter 1200. Test the family 13 Under Name. 17 For Name.Frame Height Bottom). Width Sash Left. Width Sash Right). ■ Click Apply. In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. and press ENTER. (Width Sash Right . for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula. and press ENTER. 11 In the Family Types dialog.Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . click Family Types. 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Frame Height Top . enter if(Sash Left.2 * Sash Width). 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left.Frame Height Bottom). ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. 19 In the Family Types dialog. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. (Height . 15 For Name. (Height . (Width Sash Left .Frame Height Top .Frame Height Top . 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously.2 * Sash Width). in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. and click OK. Height . You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog.

double-click Exterior. under Category. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. for Name. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. 8 In the Type Selector. click Symbolic Lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. and lock all alignment constraints. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. clear Chain. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. under Elevations. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. 3 Click OK. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. click (Plane). under Specify a new Work Plane. expand Windows. 5 On the Tools toolbar. select Elevation Swing [projection].

and glass. and click OK. and select Whites. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click . and click Duplicate. 3 In the Materials dialog. sash. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. select Sash Right. clear Coarse. and click OK three times. and click the button on the right side of the column. click in the Material column. 13 While pressing CTRL. for Visible. Next. under Detail Levels. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. you create material parameters for the frame. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. 6 In the Material Library dialog. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. and click . 5 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 7 Select Cool.11 In the drawing area. click Visibility. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. for Name. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. 18 Save the file. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click OK twice. select all symbolic lines.Matte. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under AccuRender. enter Window Frame. unless the default value is < By Category >. select Default. 4 In the New Material dialog. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Graphics. under Category. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. and on the Options Bar. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. for Name. If the subcategory already exists in the project. 17 Using the same method. while pressing CTRL. select the rectangular button on the right side. When you assign default materials in a family.

create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. 10 Save the file. Using family type parameters in the main family. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. Level. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. click Family Types. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. which nests them. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. and click Open. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. For Group parameter under. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. In this lesson. a Width type parameter. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model.1 On the Views toolbar. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. click Training Files. click the rectangular button on the right side. 6 Click OK three times. . Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. you can switch between imported families of the same category. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. The default value is By Category. click (3D). the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. Creating Nested Families | 575 . double-click Ref. enter Frame. You can override it on a type level. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. When the family is loaded into a project. If this parameter is defined as shared. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. 9 Click OK. click Add parameter. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. select Materials and Finishes. Open the families and explore the design of them. a Depth instance parameter.

12 Select the solid geometry. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. under Elevations. and click Open. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. click Training Files. under 3D views. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .5 In the Project Browser.rfa. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. and is visible only in detail level Fine. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. double-click Left. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. 7 Select the solid geometry. and click . navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. 8 Click OK. double-click View 1. and click .

Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . Reference Planes. 2 In the Open dialog.rfa. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Click OK. select Casement Window.rfa. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. click Load into Projects. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. open m_Concrete Sill. select Casement Window. 13 Click OK.rfa.rfa. and then load families into the casement window family you have created. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa is cleared. and verify that m_Metal Sill. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family.rfa is cleared. Parameters. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. You open the main family first. 6 Click OK. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. navigate to Casement Window. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. 3 Using the same method. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rfa -3D View: View1. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. and click Open. and is visible only in detail level Fine. click Load into Projects.

Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. 13 Maximize Casement Window. 5 Click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Construction ➤ Sill Length.rfa. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. in the Formula column. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. double-click Concrete Sill. enter Width . click Family Types. under Parameters. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Length. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. enter Sill Length.2* Wall Offset.rfa.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. click Add. For Type of Parameter.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. Click OK. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. select Construction.

11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify. double-click Ref. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. you place the concrete sill in the project. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. click the rectangular button on the right side. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . and lock the alignment. Level. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. click the rectangular button on the right side. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Sill Length. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. and click . Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. 3 In the Project Browser. for Dimensions ➤ Width. 2 On the View Control Bar. 10 Using the same method. 9 Click OK twice. click (Align). 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. 9 Click OK twice. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. select Insertion Depth. and click to place it. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.7 In the Type Properties dialog. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. under Floor Plans. for Dimensions ➤ Length.

and lock the alignment. double-click Left. Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. TIP If the sill does not display. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. 18 On the View Control Bar. you add a Sill Type parameter. 15 On the Tools toolbar. click and spin the wall. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. click (Align). click Detail Level ➤ Fine. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .12 Using the same method. align the bottom edge of the sill family. and lock the alignment. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. The sill is placed in the desired position.

click Shared parameter. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Sill Type. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. 9 In the Select Category dialog. under Parameters. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click New. and click Select. click Family Types. select Constraints. and click Save. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Metal Sill. enter Windows. click OK. 3 Click Apply. 10 Click OK 3 times. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. 18 On the Options Bar. Testing Nested Families | 581 . If the family is then loaded into a project. for Label. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 3 In the Save As dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. enter Training Shared Parameter. and click OK. 4 Under File name. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. under Parameter Type. click Add. for Group parameter under. enter Sill Type. select Windows.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. 12 In the Family Types dialog. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. click Family Types. under Groups. click Create. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. 16 Click OK twice. select <Family Type>. click New. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. and select Instance. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. navigate to Training. select the Concrete Sill family. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. Under Type of Parameter.

4 Click OK. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. TIP If the sill does not display. click . click Load into Projects.rfa -3D View: View 1. 3 On the Design Bar. click (3D). This creates a new project with the default template. 9 In the View Control Bar. click and spin the wall. and create a horizontal wall. click the Wall tool. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 On the Design Bar. click the Window tool. 7 Using the same method. 8 On the Views toolbar. check all views at all levels of detail. 6 In the Type Selector. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar.

Height. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. Note that the window sill has changed. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Width. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. You begin by creating the desktop. drawer base. select Metal Sill. and drawers as extrusions. and click OK. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. add the fields Mark. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. rolltop. and click .10 Select the smaller window. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . select Windows. Under Name. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. Click OK. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. enter Window Schedule with Sills.

and specify values for the furniture length and depth. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 5 On the View menu. Floor Plan: Ref. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture.rft. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. click Ref Plane. click Training Files. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . they represent the furniture centerline axes. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.Finally. 2 On the File menu. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. Level. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. 4 Maximize the view. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click New ➤ Family. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. their exact location is not critical.

10 Near the bottom of the drawing area.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. click Dimension. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. and ending at the right reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. as shown. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.

Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 13 Select the left reference plane. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. click Modify.

15 On the Design Bar. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. and ending at the lower reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . click Dimension. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane.

select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. horizontal reference plane. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 21 On the Design Bar. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.18 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. 19 Select the upper. TIP To do this.

25 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. select Family parameter.. enter Length for Name. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. Select Type... For Group parameter under. select Dimensions. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . Under Parameter Data.> for Label. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension..

These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. it will also adapt to the same changes. you can still see the model. enter Depth for Name. click Family Types. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Dimensions.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 31 In the Family Types dialog. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. 30 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under. Click OK. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Therefore. so when you open the Family Types dialog. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. enter 3000 mm for Length.

2 On the Options Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. and click to select all four symbolic lines. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. Your lines may have a lighter weight. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click . click Symbolic Lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 4 On the Design Bar.32 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. click Lines. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 7 On the Design Bar. click . “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Level for Name. Click Apply. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. and click OK. NOTE In the image below. enter 2000 mm for Length. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. click Set Work Plane. and enter 100 mm for Depth. select Level: Ref.

Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Dimension. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Front. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and select the bottom edge. 11 In the Project Browser. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.10 On the Design Bar. and select the top edge. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.

Select Type. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. select Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK. Click OK. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. For Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar.. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. enter Height for Name. select <Add parameter. For Group parameter under. select Family parameter. 25 On the Options Bar. click Modify.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. 22 On the Options Bar.. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension...> for Label. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. select Dimensions. Select Type. select Family parameter. as shown. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. enter Thickness for Name.

double-click Ref. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 4000 mm for Length. enter 2000 mm for Length. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you can still see the model. and click Apply. 31 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Level. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Enter 1200 mm for Height. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. 3 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. and click Apply. and enter 100 mm for Offset. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. Click OK. click Family Types. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. Click Apply. 30 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 750 mm for Height. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Lock the dimension as shown. click Dimension. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . Click the lock icon as shown.

14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. After you complete the rectangle. 12 On the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 10 On the Design Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. Level for Name. and click OK. select Level: Ref. click Set Work Plane. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. two lock icons display. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines.

20 On the Tools toolbar. . You can also highlight the entire line chain. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. click the Mirror tool. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis.16 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the four sketched lines. using the TAB key. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . click Modify.

as shown below at the cursor.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 23 For the align-to reference. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. click .

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.A lock icon displays. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.

as shown. select Dimensions. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. select Family parameter. select <Add parameter.> for Label. Click OK. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group parameter under.. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base.28 Add two final dimensions. Under Parameter Data.

33 On the Options Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . click Modify. 35 On the Design Bar. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click . 37 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 34 On the Design Bar. double-click Front.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference.

click . Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. 42 On the View menu. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. click the Scale control and select 1:20. and click OK. 41 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click it to lock the alignment.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Visibility/Graphics. 40 On the Design Bar. a lock icon displays. After the alignment. you can still see the model. 45 On the View Control Bar. notice that annotations display in this view. However.

and click Apply. 49 In the Family Types dialog. under Elevations. double-click Right. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click OK. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 4000 mm for Length. click Family Types. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. and click Apply. and click Apply. Click Apply. 48 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Height. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. enter 2000 mm for Length. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters.47 On the Design Bar. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

under Specify a new Work Plane. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm.2 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 6 On the Options Bar. as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . 9 Select the desk top. and click to specify the upper left corner. 8 On the Tools toolbar. then the lower horizontal sketch line. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . click Lines. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 3 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name.

click Dimension. then select the right parallel sketch line. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and lock it. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. and lock it.

16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. . 14 On the Options Bar. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. the upper sketch line. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. click the Fillet arc tool. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below.13 On the Design Bar.

and click the lock icon. double-click Front. and click the lock icon. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. 18 On the Tools toolbar. select the left edge of the rolltop. click . under Elevations. select the right edge of the rolltop. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 .

You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Family Types dialog. enter 4000 mm for Length. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click . and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. and click Apply.21 On the View toolbar. you can still see the model. click Family Types. and click Apply. If not.

3 In the Work Plane dialog. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. click Set Work Plane. Enter 750 mm for Height. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length.25 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. under Specify a new Work Plane. Click Apply. Click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Pick a Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609.

10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. click . 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click . select Multiple Alignment. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. double-click Front.5 In the Project Browser. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. click Dimension. There should be four dimensions as shown. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. click drawer set on the left. click Lines. . 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. zoom the view until you do. 6 On the Design Bar. Lock each dimension as you add it. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Tools toolbar. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first.

click . under Constraints. 29 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. Cherry. 26 In the Materials dialog. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. 31 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. for Material.Wood. click OK. 25 In the New Material dialog. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . under AccuRender. Polished. click Duplicate. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 28 Click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Shading with Edges.15 On the Tools toolbar. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. click Modify. click for Texture. Dark. click Finish Sketch. click . click OK. 27 In the Material Library dialog. 20 On the View toolbar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. enter Desk . and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 22 On the Options Bar. click . click 24 In the Materials dialog. click Extrusion Properties.

Enter 200 mm for Thickness. you can still see the model. enter 2000 mm for Length. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 34 In the Family Types dialog. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. click Family Types. If not. and click Apply. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 35 In the Family Types dialog. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Click OK.

rfa file. click Component. and click OK. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. click New. click Family Types. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 8 Under Family Types. 11 On the File menu. 15 On the View Control Bar. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. click 14 On the View toolbar. click New. 18 In the Open dialog. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click New. 5 Under Family Types. click . 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. click Apply. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click Open. click Save. and click Apply. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. click Load. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 3 In the Name dialog. under Family Types. and click OK. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . Training Furniture. and click Apply. 19 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Family Types dialog. to start a new project based on your default template. 9 In the Name dialog. and click OK. select it. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth.

Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. 23 In the Type Selector. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to add the third desk. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. and add the second desk. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.21 In the Type Selector. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks.

8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . However. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. and double-click Ref. 9 On the Design Bar. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Level. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Set Work Plane.rft. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the View menu. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Training Files. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). Level for Name. click Lines. select Ref. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. their exact location is not critical. click New ➤ Family.

click Modify and select the extrusion. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. click New ➤ Project. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.rte. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. 7 On the File menu. click . double-click Front. 14 Click the lock icon. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the Modelling tab. click Stairs. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. click Finish Sketch. The new custom baluster is now complete.rfa. 11 On the Design Bar. By default. 12 On the Options Bar.

21 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the View menu. 11 On the View menu. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. click Edit/New. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. click Shading with Edges. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. under Baluster Family. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. click OK. 9 On the View toolbar. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Orient ➤ Southwest. and click Open. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select it. click .8 In the Open dialog. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster.rfa file. click Modify and select the existing railing. 19 Click OK. click .

verify that Ref. you create a rail profile.rfa. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. you draw a sweep profile. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .rft. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail.Sweep. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. The new sweep profile is now complete.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. click Training Files.rft. a reveal. and other sweep-defined objects. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. under Floor Plans. click New ➤ Family. a stair nosing. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Lines. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . a railing. balusters. their exact location is not critical. soffits. In this lesson. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. However. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. you create five different profiles: a sweep. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. click New ➤ Family. cornices. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. and a host sweep. Level is open.

with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. their exact location is not critical. click Training Files. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. click Lines. In the left pane of the New dialog. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.Rail. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. you create a stair nosing profile.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. click New ➤ Family. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. However. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .rft. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal.Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. you create a reveal profile. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. click Lines. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template.Stair Nosing. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. verify that Ref. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. In addition. click New ➤ Family.rfa.rft. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. In the left pane of the New dialog. Level is open. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. However. their exact location is not critical. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face.

click Training Files. The new reveal profile is now complete. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . under Floor Plans. which may be any vertical surface. click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines.rft.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. verify that Ref.rfa. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. However. you create a host sweep profile. their exact location is not critical. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise.Reveal. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . click New ➤ Family. Level is open. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser.

the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). their exact location is not critical. click Browse. click Training Files. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. However.Host Sweep. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The new host sweep profile is now complete. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. click OK. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. click Create.rte. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. click New ➤ Project. click Lines. 2 In the New Project dialog.rfa. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Create a new project 1 On the File menu.

click Load Profiles.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. select Generic Models for Family Category. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. the exact location of the path is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar. beside Load Profiles. click Ref Plane. and double-click South. navigate to the location of Profile . 13 In the Open dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Profile . 14 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. and click Open. click . Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 7 In the Name dialog. click Sketch 2D Path. enter Sweep for Name. select it. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.Sweep. and click OK. click Finish Family. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rfa.Sweep. 15 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations. click Finish Sweep. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . NOTE When you sketch the 2D path.

click Browse.rte. Under Other. 23 Select the sweep profile again and. 4 In the New Project dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . Under Constraints. 25 Click OK. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. on the Options Bar. click Training Files. 27 On the View toolbar. 2 In the New Project dialog. click . you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. 26 On the Design Bar.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New ➤ Project. 22 Select the sweep profile and. select Profile Is Flipped. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click Wall. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click OK. click Finish Family. click Edit. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The sweep profile application is now complete. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

their exact location is not critical.NOTE When you draw the walls. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that Horizontal is selected. 6 Draw four walls as shown. click . 7 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 .

click Edit/New. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag. you specify the room tag parameters. click Spin [Shift].12 On the Design Bar.Host Sweep for Profile.Host Sweep. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.Host Sweep : Profile . navigate to the location of Profile .rft. 14 In the Open dialog. 19 On the View toolbar. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Profile . Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click Training Files. under Construction. click Modify. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. click . Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. . and click Open. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. floor and ceiling finish. and click OK. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 15 Select the wall sweep and. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. you create a room tag which displays room name. and area with labels added to extract project data.rfa. select it. on the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. In the left pane of the New dialog. click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

select Name. enter 2mm for Name. click . click Edit/New. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. click Label. select Ceiling Finish. and click OK. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. and click OK. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. select Area. 17 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Options Bar. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. select Underline. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. click Label. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 7 In the Type properties dialog. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 .Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Finish. and click OK. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. clear Underline. select Label : 2mm. and click OK.

and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. click Training Files. 3 On the Options Bar. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. click Lines. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click . This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. notice that there is only one view available. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson.rfa. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. The new room tag is now ready for use. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. In the left pane of the New dialog.

Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 6 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.

under Modify Subcategories.rfa. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. click Sheet. 7 Click OK. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. 16 In the Type Selector. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click OK. enter North Line for Name. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select North Line. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. Training North Arrow. click Browse. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. select A1 metric. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 17 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 9 On the File menu. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. 4 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. in the North Line row. click Object Styles. select 3 for Line Weight. click New ➤ Project. and select the upper vertical line. click New. click Modify. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. and click OK. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 2 In the New Project dialog.rte.

and labels. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise.rft. The titleblock has linework. select Training North Arrow.rfa. click Symbol. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. graphics.10 In the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select it. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . and click Open. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. In the left pane of the New dialog. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. 14 On the Design Bar. and your project data. click New ➤ Titleblock. text. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. click Modify. click Training Files.

632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. click . 3 On the Options Bar. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter 140 for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. and enter -25 for Offset.Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click Lines. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. and click . click . . 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. and click to draw a new vertical line.

19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . 13 In the Type Selector. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 17 On the Options Bar. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and enter 20 for Offset. select Wide Lines. press CTRL. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line.12 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar.

click Training Files. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Edit/New. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. click . you add a company logo. click Import/Link ➤ Image. text notes.The titleblock linework is now complete. 6 On the Options Bar. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar.jpg. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. click Duplicate. and labels to your titleblock. and open Common\Company Logo. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Text : 8mm.9 In the Name dialog. and select the last text note. click Modify. 11 Click OK twice. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. and add an address and phone number as shown. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and select Bold. 17 On the Design Bar. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. under Text. in the text box. 18 Select the drag handle. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . and drag the text note down as shown. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. enter 10 for Text Size. enter 10mm Bold for Name.

click Text. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. click . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. Add consultant name. click Modify. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. address.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the consultant text note. 24 On the Options Bar.

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .

and enter Sheet Number:. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. enter 5mm for Name. click Edit/New. select Text : 5mm.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Date:. and enter Drawn By:. 34 Click OK twice. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and enter Checked By:. click Duplicate. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Text. enter 5 for Text Size. 32 In the Name dialog. under Text.

42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Project Issue Date. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Label. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and click OK. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. select Label : 15mm Label. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. click Center and Middle. enter 15 for Text Size. and click to specify the label location. 53 In the Name dialog. under Text. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Sheet Number. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. select Checked By and click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. 55 Click OK twice. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 15mm Label for Name. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Duplicate. select Drawn By. and click to specify the label location. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. click Label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Project Number. 50 On the Options Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field.

66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. click Label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and click to specify the label location. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . and click to specify the label location. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Project Name. and click OK. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. select Client Name. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

click Modify. click Load. select it. 73 In the Name dialog. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Open dialog.70 On the Options Bar. enter 4mm Label. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 9 Click OK. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. and click OK. click . click Edit/New.rfa file. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and click OK. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. click New ➤ Project. and click Open. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field.rte. click Training Files. 75 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. enter 4 for Text Size. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Left and Middle. select 4mm Label. under Text. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 77 On the Options Bar. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. and labels are now complete. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. The titleblock graphics. and click to specify the label location. select File Path. text. click Sheet.rfa. click Browse. 80 On the Design Bar. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click OK. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

16 Click OK. under Other. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. Enter Office Building for Project Name.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter In Progress for Project Status. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. and click OK. click Project Information. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. click . enter Name for Drawn By. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the titleblock. 14 On the Settings menu. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 .

and set the suffix to None. click Project Units. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. and open Common\c_Pantheon. To change the units of measurement to meters. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. set the Area to Square meters. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. Set the Length units to millimeters. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Settings menu. click Training Files. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. format the Area to use 2 decimal places.

and click OK. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. expand Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. select Roofs for Family Category. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. 2 In the Project Browser. select Pick a Plane. and click Open View.Center. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 10 In the Go To View dialog. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. and double-click South. click Create. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Name dialog. expand Elevations.Next. select Section: Wall Section . click Set Work Plane. 8 In the Work Plane dialog. enter Dome for Name.

Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar.The center wall section view is displayed. click Lines. 12 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. click . click Axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click . 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis.

20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. and select Chain. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 .17 Move the cursor out. click . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 19 On the Options Bar.

The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click Lines. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click .

Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 32 On the Options Bar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. click Lines. click and select Chain. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. click .

click for Material. click OK.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. and click OK. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 38 In the Materials dialog. 40 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Materials and Finishes. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. select Concrete . 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. select Floors for Family Category. click Create. click Finish Family.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click Revolution Properties. click Finish Sketch. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 42 On the View toolbar.

select Section: Wall Section . 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 9 In the Go To View dialog. and click OK. double-click South. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click .3 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. and click Open View. and click OK. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Set Work Plane. click Axis. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 .Center. select Pick a Plane. enter Concave Floor for Name. 6 On the Design Bar.

14 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . click Lines. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. 15 Specify the intersection of the T.O. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. Footing level line and the axis.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar.

When you create a new family. 24 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. click Finish Family. click Revolution Properties. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click OK. Based on the template you select. 22 In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. and title blocks.18 Specify the intersection of the T. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile.O.Exploring Family Templates | 653 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. click for Material. Appendix A . click Finish Sketch.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. such as reference planes and sub-categories. the new family has specific default contents.O. annotation families. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. Appendix A . and click OK. you start with the selection of a family template. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. double-click 3D Section View. select Cobblestone for Name.

The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *. Category: None Baluster . Contains sample wall geometry. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families.Post Family template for posts of balusters. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates.

Includes the filled region tool. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. is used to create 2D detail components.rft Description Column Family template to create columns.Template Name *. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. includes the filled region tool. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. the column inherits the material of the wall. If a column intersects a wall.

Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project.Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls.Template Name *. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Door .

Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Template Name *.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families.

Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project.Template Name *.

Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Model Family Templates | 659 . Contains sample roof geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Includes the filled region tool. Contains sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value.

Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample roof geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. Contains sample floor geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry.

The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Contains sample ceiling geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures.

Contains sample ceiling geometry. Masses can report gross volume. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families.Template Name *. slabs. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Contains sample wall geometry. and gross floor areas. gross surface area. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project.

Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families.Template Name *. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 .

Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. A profile is only used in combination with system families. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. Category: Profiles. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps.Template Name *. A profile is only used in combination with system families.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Profiles. slab edge. Category: Profiles. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. A profile is only used in combination with system families. gutter. Profile usage (fascia. mullion. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families.

The family has an rpc file link included. Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Category: Profiles. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. A profile is used only in combination with system families.

Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. the column cuts out the wall. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Beams can be placed on structural columns. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. such as beams and braces. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. If a structural column intersects a wall. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols.Template Name *. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures.

such as trusses. Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 . Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side.Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls.Template Name *. Category: Structural Framing Window .rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing .

and parameters. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.0mm has a size of 2.0mm on a plotted sheet. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags.Template Name *. Annotation families are scale-dependent. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. filled regions. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. parameter text created with a text height of 2. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. text size. text. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. Thus.rft Window Description Family template for windows. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Symbol size. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout.

rft ■ New Site Metric.rft ■ A4 metric.rft ■ A2 metric.rft ■ D . Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border. You import images to your title block.42 x 30. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 .rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet. filled regions. and parameters.rft ■ A3 metric.24 x 18.rft Metric ■ A0 metric. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.17 x 11. text.rft ■ A1 metric.5.rft ■ B . Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.Template Name *. In the Select a Titleblock dialog.11 x 8. Imperial ■ A . In a project. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rft ■ E1 .36 x 24.rft ■ C .

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. you will understand the process. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. The truss also has multiple types.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. 671 . In this case. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. During this tutorial. assigned subcatecories. At the end of this tutorial. not specifically how to make a floor truss. and detail level controls. formula-based parameters. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. In exercises that become increasingly complex. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. methodology.

Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Two types should be created. In this lesson. In addition. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. you should avoid over-designing the component. NOTE When creating a new family. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. this must be a structural beam component. it is not the best solution. a generic floor-based component might work. Take this into consideration during your design planning. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. It should also be an available option within a beam system. beams. For training purposes. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. and structural walls. In this case. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. you determine the requirements of the new component. In this case. For every complexity added to a family. Although this solution is possible. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. and also works intuitively with them. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. In the next exercise.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process.

would require Instance or Type parameters. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. 4 Continue with the next exercise. In addition. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . you determined that the component type is a structural beam. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. such as wood type. Depending on the family you are designing. In the previous exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling.

and open Metric\Templates. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. scroll to the structural framing templates. for example: wall based or floor based. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. There are two structural framing templates provided. you will access them from the Training Files folder. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. In addition.Beams and Braces. ■ Metric Structural Framing . 6 In the New dialog. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. click Training Files. Select it so that the preview displays. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rft. On the right side of the New dialog. Usually. 4 Scroll through the various template options. notice the preview. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. this is where you access family templates. However. Like most generic family templates. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.

Complex and Trusses. Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing .rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Complex and Trusses. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Floor Plan: Ref.rft and notice the preview. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template.Beams and Braces. Because of its simplicity. 10 Maximize the view. and display functions required by structural beams. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. and notice the preview.rft to open it. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). spacing.rft. Level.Beams and Braces.

Reference Plane: Left. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. 11 In the Project Browser. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. Level. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. under Elevations. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. you add reference planes to the beam design. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. double-click View 1. double-click Ref. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under 3D Views. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. 12 In the Project Browser. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. you add the reference planes. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. double-click Front. however. lines. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Like many templates. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. Therefore. NOTE When creating or modifying a family.In this view. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. under Floor Plans.

The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 .3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. In the image below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. In the project plan view image below. notice the location of the beam extents. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project.

click Ref Plane. In a later exercise. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. Before adding new reference planes. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click . you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep.

click Ref Plane. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Front. click on the Edit toolbar. under Elevations. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. Level. 13 On the Design Bar. To do this. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. click to place it. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. select the lower horizontal reference plane. click . These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. Level as the mirror axis. Level. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.Add ref. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. and select the Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. click Ref Plane.

Before you move on to the next exercise. specify an Offset of 200 mm. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. click to place it as shown. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. 19 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown.

Level.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. which you do in the next exercise. 24 In the Project Browser. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. 22 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. click to place it as shown. under Floor Plans. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. click to place it as shown. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. specify an Offset of 238 mm.

28 In the Save As dialog. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Modify. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below. In the following exercise. and click Save. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save.

separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. 2 On the Options Bar. and click the EQ symbol when it displays.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rfa. click . click Modify. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. click Dimension. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. After adding the dimension. Wood Floor Truss. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. This tool is the aligned dimension tool.

and the lower horizontal reference plane.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. under Elevations. 9 On the Design Bar. place the dimension to the left as shown. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Place the dimension as shown. double-click Front. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. the Center reference plane. Level. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref.

Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . and place it below the dimension you added previously.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. add two dimensions as shown. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 15 Add four dimensions as shown.

You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. consider making it a type parameter. Wood Floor Truss. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. you will add additional reference planes. double-click Ref. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible.rfa. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. consider making it an instance parameter. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Level. dimensions. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. under Floor Plans. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. If the component has material that varies per component.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. Throughout the tutorial. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. In addition. and constraints as needed. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. When you design a new family. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. In this exercise. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In the next exercise. consider making it a type parameter. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. it becomes a parameter.

■ Click OK. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. under Elevations.3 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Family parameter. enter Depth for Name. Select Type. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Select Type. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Add parameter for Label. enter Chord Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . select Add parameter for Label. double-click Front. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Under Parameter Data.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

This project consists of foundation walls. right-click in the Design Bar. a wood sill. and a wood rim joist. and click Structural. double-click Level 1. 2 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D . therefore. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.Southeast Isometric. 5 On the Options Bar. expand Views. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. The rim joist was added as a beam. click Beam. under Floor Plans. verify that Chain is not selected. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . a slab. 6 Using point-to-point insertion.

you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. under 3D Views. not the wall or rim joist.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams.Southeast Isometric. You do not need to be precise. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. double-click Level 1. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. double-click 3D . 8 In the Project Browser. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.

10 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . 11 On the Edit menu. under 3D Views. click Undo Drag. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. This should return the project to its original dimension. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.Southeast Isometric. 13 In the Save as dialog. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. In the next lesson. 12 On the File menu. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. click Save as. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.

5 On the File menu. and click Hide Element.rfa. Level. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. click Hide/Isolate. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. 15 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. This will aid in the placement of the wood web.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. click Training Files. double-click Ref. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you nest two wooden web members into the truss. click Yes. click Edit Family. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. under Floor Plans. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. Because the family is already open. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view.rfa is the active file.

Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. Do not select it. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. click Component. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. In the following steps. under Elevations. 13 For the align-to point. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. 10 In the Project Browser. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. double-click Front. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. 7 In the Type Selector. You will align the left web component first. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion.This family is a single extrusion as shown.

it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 18 Add two reference planes as shown.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. 16 On the Design Bar. In addition. click Modify. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. click Ref Plane.

Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.19 On the Tools menu. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. In the steps that follow. click Align. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width.

length. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. under Parameters. click Family Types. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. you label these dimensions. ■ In the next exercise. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. or the width of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. 27 On the File menu. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 28 In the Save As dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. you add new parameters to control the web components. click Modify. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 26 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Types dialog. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. click Save As. click Add. Place the dimension as shown.

(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. In addition. 12 On the Design Bar. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. Select Type. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. under Other. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. In the Type Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Select Length for Type. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. Select Common for Discipline. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 5 Click OK. enter Depth . click Modify. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. click OK. click OK. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. select WebDepth. under Constraints. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. and click Element Properties.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. under 3D Views. click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. and click OK. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. click Beam. click Family Types. click Save. select m_WWF3. 350. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. <result-if-true>. select Override parameter values of existing types. 16 In the Type Selector. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. 22 On the File menu. 20 On the Design Bar. select 89x38.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. double-click 3D . 2 On the Options Bar. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. click Modify. 400. 286. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. if(Length < 9000. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. and click Yes. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. Notice the two beam types.rvt. 18 In the Type Selector. select 64x38. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600.Southeast Isometric. under Dimensions. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. if(Length < 7500. 400))) 6 Click Apply.

14 In the Project Browser. select m_WWF3. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. and click OK. and click Apply. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. select Override parameter values of existing types. double-click 3D . NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. click Apply. enter 6000 for length.Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. 16 On the File menu. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 8 In the Family Types dialog. Notice the truss depth increases. double-click Level 1.rvt. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Floor Plans. 17 Close any open files.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Save. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. enter 8000 for length. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. click Load into Projects. and click OK. and click Yes. You have completed this tutorial. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. 11 In the Reload Family dialog.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

you need to change the length of the wall. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. and you can change these elements individually. you select the grid. and mullions. 743 . This affects the entire curtain system. Like walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you need to select a panel. For example. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Like windows. and they are not windows. panel. Unlike windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. grid lines. or you can use a specific curtain system command.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. To change grids. to resize the system. To switch panel types.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall.rvt.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. click Training Files. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Wall. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. you create a curtain system using the wall command. and double-click Ground Floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

8 In the Project Browser. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. Creating an Entrance | 745 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric.

you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.11 Select the curtain system. and room bounding. using curtain grids. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. top constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. top and base attachments. and click (Properties). For Top Offset. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. under Floor Plans. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Click OK. enter 1200.

THIRD FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR.a. select SECOND FLOOR. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. FOURTH FLOOR. while pressing CTRL. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 26 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. click Curtain Grid. SIXTH FLOOR. click Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 747 . 25 On the Design Bar. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. click Modify. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and SEVENTH FLOOR. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and click Rename. and resize the crop boundary as shown. right-click Elevation 1 .

31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. click Modify. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 33 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. one larger than the other. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. Click to create a vertical grid. Click to place another grid line. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar.

35 Select the left vertical grid line.Next. click Add or Remove Segments. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The two segments are removed. Creating an Entrance | 749 . you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Instead of using the Door command. and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it. The segment line style changes to dashed.

42 Place dimensions as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. and lock them. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click Curtain Grid.38 Using the same method. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown.

To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 54 On the Design Bar. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.43 Delete the dimensions. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. Creating an Entrance | 751 . 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.rfa. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click in any white space to exit the editor. Use the following image as a guide. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. The panel changes to a double door. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Next. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 52 On the Type Selector. click Modify. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. click Training Files. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid).

This changes the graphics style of the view. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Next. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. under Elevations. 63 Click OK twice. 60 On the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 56 In the Project Browser. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 55 In the Project Browser. 61 With the panel still selected. and the solid panels display in white. not as curtain panels. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 62 In the Element Properties dialog. on the new curtain system you added. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. They are part of the curtain panel category. click . The glazed panels display in blue. click . Now. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and click Wireframe. double-click Entrance Elevation. click System Panel : Solid. 57 On the View Control Bar. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid.These panels schedule as doors. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 65 On the View Control Bar.

select Entire Grid Line. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. click Save As. 68 On the File menu.rvt.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Mullion. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Grid Line Segment. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . 4 On the Options Bar. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 2 On the Options Bar.

Mullions can change their joins to other mullions.6 On the Options Bar. Two mullion join controls display. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. select All Empty Segments. so you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. there are a few that you do not want. You are going to change some mullion joins. however. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 9 Delete the mullions below them.

You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. double-click Southeast Isometric. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you can also right-click. Curved Curtain System | 755 . This completes the exercise for adding mullions. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 16 Save the file. 13 Click the top mullion control. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. click Modify. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 15 In the Project Browser. Finally. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Finally. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. you add a curtain system using the wall command.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 14 On the Design Bar.

For Top Offset. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. enter 1200. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Click .Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 4 In the Type Selector. click Wall. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. under Floor Plans. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. for Top Constraint. double-click GROUND FLOOR. (Arc passing through three points).

14 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . click Modify. Divide the halves into quarters. Next. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. you place grids on the system.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. click Curtain Grid. Next. 16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. double-click East. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. under Elevations. You are going to use one of these snaps points. eighths. and then sixteenths.

rft. select Basic Wall: Generic .Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. click Lines. enter 100. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. click Training Files. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and on the Options Bar. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 3 In the Project Browser. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. 18 In the Type Selector. click . 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . double-click Exterior.300mm. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. select the bottom layer of panels. for Depth. under Elevations. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar.

rfa family. right-click.8 On the Design Bar. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 9 Select the extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar.Pattern. click Modify. All fourth floor panels are selected. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 .rfa. 12 On the Options Bar. click Model Lines. 21 In the Type Selector. and save the family as Curtain Panel . under Floor Plans. select Curtain Panel . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. .Pattern. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and return to the project file. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.Pattern. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. and click . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. select Glass. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. click Finish Sketch. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. clear Chain. and click OK. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.

The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. select System Panel . 28 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View toolbar.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and click Flip Orientation. 23 Right-click. 26 In the Project Browser. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. All fifth floor panels are selected. click (Default 3D View). The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. All the panels change to the solid panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise.Solid. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 29 Save the file.

click Mullion. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select it. For vertical mullions. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. for Profile Usage. click Training Files.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ For Sides. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . select Mullion. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Click again to specify the ending point. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. under Elevations. click Lines. enter 8. . 1 In the Project Browser. double-click East. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Select Radius. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog.

click Mullion. and return to the project file. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 13 On the Options Bar. clear Fine.detail. click Visibility. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. double-click Southeast Isometric. After the new profile is loaded. and click OK. 27 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . and click Visibility. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. it can be added as a mullion type. 28 Click . 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Circular Mullion for Family. 20 Select the detail component. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 30 Click .rfa family. and click OK. click Modify. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion.11 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.rfa. click Modify. clear Coarse and Medium.rfa. under 3D Views. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

37 On the Options Bar. 42 Press DELETE. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . right-click. so you remove the unwanted ones. 40 In the Project Browser. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. you learned to create a curved curtain system.32 Click Edit/New. 39 On the Design Bar. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. click Modify. for Profile. click Duplicate. 35 Under Construction. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. You have placed more mullions than you want. and click OK. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. double-click GROUND FLOOR. make custom curtain panels and mullions. select All Empty Segments. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. In this lesson. under Floor Plans. 43 Save the file. 36 Click OK twice.

4 On the Design Bar. and press TAB. Click OK. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. and you can click to select them all. and a ruled curtain system. 7 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. double-click TOP OF ROOF. enter 600. 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof. select Defines slope. click Pick Walls. TIP To chain select all the walls. 9 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. select System Family: Sloped Glazing.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight. a storefront system.

2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. Storefront System | 765 . click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. click Mullion. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Storefront System In this exercise. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. under Floor Plans.10 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 14 On the Options Bar. 18 Save the file. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 1 In the Project Browser.

select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. click Wall.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 4 In the Type Selector. and enter 2400. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.

12 Select the storefront wall. This specifies an exact length for the wall. click Edit/New. click Modify. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 9 On the Design Bar. To see how the grid layout is defined. which is specified in the type.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. even if the wall height changes. under 3D Views. For this wall. 10 In the Project Browser. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. and press ENTER. enter 10200 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. Storefront System | 767 . and click . double-click Southeast Isometric. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 8 Click the temporary dimension. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm.

double-click Southeast Isometric. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. click Mullion. By setting the Angle value. and Offset. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. Angle. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 20 Save the file. center. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 18 On the Options Bar. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 19 Select a curtain grid. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. select All Empty Segments. 16 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. Justification. enter 15. In this exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. or end. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. you find Number. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. under 3D Views. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. see the Revit Architecture help. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.

Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. and highlight the model line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 Click the highlighted line.3 On the View Control Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.

but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. and click . and then eighths. click Curtain Grid. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . click Modify. 11 Click OK.8 Select the highlighted line. quarters. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 10 Select the panel. Next. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 9 On the Design Bar. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.

In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 18 Save the file. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. and define a ruled curtain system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. right-click. 16 In the Type Selector.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters. and then eighths. select System Panel : Solid. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. embed a curtain system inside another wall. Finally. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. Curtain System by Lines | 771 .

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

Roofs 19 In this tutorial. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008. In addition. gutters. 773 .

select Name. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and open Metric\m_Roofs. click Training Files. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. expand Floor Plans.Creating Roofs In this lesson. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. 1 In the Project Browser. gable. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and mansard roofs. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. including hip. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 4 Click OK. You do not need to create the work plane. and double-click Level 1. 5 In the Go To View dialog. you learn to create several different types of roofs. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. shed. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. In this lesson. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and click OK.

8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click the blue square on the witness line. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and so on). To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. centerline. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. click Ref Plane. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof profile. Next. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

16 On the View toolbar. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click to display the model. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click . 18 Select the edge of the roof. click . The roof should resemble the following illustration. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Next. press TAB.

click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. expand Sections (Type 1). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and select the second wall. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. press CTRL. click Modify.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. expand Views (all). 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View toolbar. 21 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls.

and on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. m_Roofs. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. By default. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. verify that Defines slope is selected. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. Next. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. clear Defines slope. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. 9 Press CTRL. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.rvt. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select both slope definition lines.

you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans.rvt. When you complete the roof. and double-click Level 3. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 11 On the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. 12 When you see the informational dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. m_Roofs. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 14 Proceed to the next exercise.

12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 9 Using automatic snaps. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Modify. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . click Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. 10 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. select Defines Slope. sketch the chimney opening. 6 Click to select all the walls.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click .

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click to view the new roof in the model.15 On the Options bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. and double-click Level 2. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Finish Roof. m_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). close the roof sketch. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. select Defines slope. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. and enter 600 for Overhang. select Defines Slope.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

9 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. select the left vertical slope definition line. 7 On the Options Bar. click to display the model. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. clear Defines Slope. Next. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click .6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 14 Under Constraints. and click OK. 11 To trim the first line segment. 16 On the View toolbar. click Lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Finish Roof. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Next. click Roof Properties. and click .

784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click . Next. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Modify. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 22 Using the same method that you used previously.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. clear Defines Slope. press TAB. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. expand Views (all).The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Options Bar. enter 0 for Overhang. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and enter 300 for Overhang. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. m_Roofs. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.

select the left vertical roof line. Next. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you add a slope-defining line. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. 10 To trim the first line segment. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof.7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click . Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Under Constraints. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Next. click Modify. click Roof Properties. and click OK. and press ENTER. select Defines slope. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Slope Arrow. and enter 600 for Offset. 12 On the Options Bar. and double-click 3D. verify is selected. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. m_Roofs. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. Next. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Before you can add slope arrows. you need to add two reference planes. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . click .rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. 7 On the Options Bar. add two new slope arrows. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. Next. 9 On the Tools menu. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Floor Plans. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. To help locate the position of each split. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all).21 Proceed to the next exercise. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Ref Plane. expand 3D Views. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. click Modify. expand Views (all). clear Defines Slope. click Split Walls and Lines. and double-click Level 2. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.

Begin the tail at the right reference plane. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. 5 On the Options Bar. click Edit. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). and double-click Garage Roof. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and move the cursor to place the arrow. 18 Press CTRL. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. .rvt. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 20 Under Dimensions.15 to add the second slope arrow. select Slope for Specify. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. When you sketch a hip roof. When eave heights differ. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. the adjacent eave heights must align. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select Defines Slope. m_Roofs.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . and then click OK. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. select both slope arrows. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. click Save As. click to display the model.6 With the two gable end lines selected. select a method to align the eaves. on the File menu. The eave lines display with a dimension. click . enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves. on the Options Bar. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the View toolbar. click Align Eaves. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Dimensions. 14 If you want to save your changes.

select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Elevations. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. click to display the model. under Constraints. expand Views (all). click Training Files.rvt. 3 Select the roof and. click . and double-click North. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the View toolbar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and Soffits In this lesson. and then select Defines slope. After you create a roof. click . click Modify. you learn how to create roof fascia. you can easily create its fascia. gutters. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. Gutters. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and soffits. under Dimensions. click Save As. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. expand Views (all). 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and select the remaining three lines. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. expand Floor Plans. click . 14 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. gutters. and Soffits | 791 . Gutters. press TAB. 18 If you want to save your changes. Creating Fascia. 17 On the View toolbar. and click OK.Next. Creating Fascia. click Finish Roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. click Lines. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. on the File menu. and double-click Level 3.

under Construction. and click Open. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. and click OK twice.rvt. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 3 Press CTRL. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Condominium. 8 In the Name dialog. click . and click OK. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click Training Files. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Duplicate. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Built-up Fascia. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click in the Value field for Material. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click . Creating Gutters In this exercise. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. . click Edit/New. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.13 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 Click to place the gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. c_Condominium. under Construction. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK three times. Creating Gutters | 793 .

794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 4 Select the roof. expand Views. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Pick Roofs. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and then select the soffit to join them. 7 On the Tools menu. 9 If you want to save your changes. 6 In the Project Browser. click Join Geometry. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Save As. and double-click 3D. Creating Soffits | 795 . expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand 3D Views. 8 Select the roof.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. 797 . you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Finally.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial.

and click Room and Area. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu.rvt. click Training Files. For Rounding. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. and open Common\c_Area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Unit Suffix. select mm. select 2 decimal places. expand Views (all). 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. under Length. 2 In the Project Units dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. your values will be different. click OK. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select m2 Click OK. select Millimeters. For Unit Suffix. click the Area Schemes tab. 4 In the Project Units dialog. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 3 Under Area. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click Settings. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. If you are using metric units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Click OK. In the final exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Project Units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select Square meters. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. These schemes define spatial relationships.

Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. If you select No. 12 When the informational dialog displays.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 9 Click Cancel. When you select Yes in this dialog. under Views (all). or 0. click the Room Calculations tab. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Click OK. forming a closed loop. it is not necessary in this exercise. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. you must manually add these boundary lines. click Area Plan. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. the system-computed height defaults to the level. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 13 In the Project Browser. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model.

18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. common areas. and store area. click Area. rather than the area tag. To modify the area.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Plan. Next. you must select one of the reference lines. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Click OK. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. you create a new area plan for rentable space. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines.

NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. When you add area boundary lines. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. When you pick the walls. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 23 On the Design Bar. If you do not select this option. click Area Boundary. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 21 On the Options Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click Area. you can either draw them or pick them. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 .

and click to select the area. click . NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. Click OK. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Area. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 31 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. click . 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Design Bar. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . 32 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click Modify and select the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. enter Core for Name.33 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Office area for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Click OK. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 .

and click Save. 37 On the File menu. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.Notice that within the two store areas. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. In the next exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click to place the legend. In this exercise.rvt. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. name the project Area-in progress. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

5 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. under Category. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.3 When the dialog displays. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 9 Click OK. and click OK. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Area Type and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Under Available fields. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. select Areas (Rentable).

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. or both. In this tutorial. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. building elements. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roofs. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. If you modify a massing face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. At any time. floors. After you make building elements. 807 . After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. curtain systems. you then need to update the building face.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project.

Using Massing Tools In this lesson. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise.rvt. double-click Level 1. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. You assign the default wall. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. floor. under Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. roofs. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Massing. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Create Mass. sweeps. and cutting geometry. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. and floors. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. click Training Files. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click 17 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). on the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 15 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. on the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. click the Value for Material. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . click Lines. and click OK. and click OK.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. and then click . click . under Constraints. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown.

TIP If necessary. under Constraints. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. select Pick a plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 24 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Materials dialog. click the Value for Material. 30 Click to select the face. double-click West. 27 On the Design Bar. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. press TAB to highlight the entire face. highlight the larger form. under Materials and Finishes. 29 In the drawing area. under Views (all). select Mass (Transparent) for Name. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Views (all). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click . The second form is on top of the first form. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Extrusion Properties. 20 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Work Plane dialog.

and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 36 On the Options Bar. and click to select the line start point. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click . 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Next. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click Lines. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. TIP If you do not see this option. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and click on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 .31 On the Sketch Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. click .

under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 44 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. on the Options Bar. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing .38 On the Design Bar. click 48 Create an arc as shown. click . double-click East. click Lines and. and delete the vertical construction line. 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 45 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. . 40 On the Edit toolbar. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. . click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 47 On the Options Bar.

53 Proceed to the next exercise. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. In the next exercise. click Blend Properties. 51 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. and click OK. 52 On the View toolbar.49 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. click . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . click Finish Sketch.

on the Options Bar. 2 In the drawing area. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Using the same technique. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click and select Chain. m_Massing_Start. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Extrusion Properties. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. click Lines and. 14 Click OK. 13 Under Constraints. as shown. 4 On the Options bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. and 0 for Extrusion Start. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. and then click Hidden Line. click and enter 15000 for Offset.rvt. When sketching each extrusion. under Floor Plans. on the View Control Bar. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . 9 On the Design Bar. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. under Views (all). snap the corners to the intersections. select the mass.

enter 15000 mm for Width.rfa. In this exercise. and click OK. click Training Files. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click Family Types. 12000 mm for Height. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Finally. click Finish Mass.rvt. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click New. under Other. click Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. you create new family types from a mass family file. 3 In the Name dialog. 18 On the File menu.16 On the View toolbar. click . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and 18000 mm for Depth. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.

and click OK. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. click Save As. and 9000 mm for Depth. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. 1 If not already selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply.rfa. and 6000 mm for Depth. 18000 mm for Height. 11000 mm for Height. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. 10 On the File menu. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. You also load other existing mass families and place them. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file.rvt. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. In this exercise. 9 Click OK. and click OK. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. and click Apply.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name.

22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. click Training Files. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 8 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 17 Press CTRL. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. under Views (all). 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. and Triangle. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. Arc Dome. click Modify. and click to place the mass. under Floor Plans. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 4 On the File menu. and click OK twice.2 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. select the triangle. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click Place Mass.rfa. select the 3 boxes. Semi Barrel Vault.rfa. 21 On the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 11 Select the box. enter 90 for Angle. 20 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown.rfa family files. double-click Site. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 16 On the Design Bar. 6 Open the Box-Training. and click . and click . 23 On the Options Bar. 25 In the drawing area. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . 10 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Rotate after placement. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 In the Type Selector.

you join these mass elements. 29 In the Type Selector. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. click Place Mass. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.26 Select the triangle. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . In this exercise. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. and click OK twice. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 33 On the View toolbar. click . Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. and click . 31 Select the box and click . and click OK twice. 34 On the View menu. click Orient ➤ Northeast. In the next exercise. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.

and then press ESC to see the result.rvt file. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry. click . you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. 4 Select the triangle. .Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 819 .

click 8 On the Options Bar. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. double-click Site. under Views (all). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. click for Axis. under Floor Plans. enter SM. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. on the Edit toolbar. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 821 . . 17 Press ESC to see the result. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. In this exercise. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. you joined mass elements together. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. and then select the triangle. click . click 14 On the Tools toolbar.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element.

click Place Mass. 5 In the Project Browser. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. enter 90 degrees for Angle.rvt. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 7 In the Type Selector. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 2 On the Window menu. under Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . and then click OK. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. and select the triangle mass element. select Sloped (primary). you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. select Rotate after placement. clear Curved. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. do not clear the check mark. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click . (If Design Options is already selected. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 1 On the Design Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. double-click Site.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 8 On the Options Bar.

double-click North. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. and click . TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. under Views (all). 18 In the Type Selector. 16 On the View Control Bar. click . and click Wireframe. under Elevations. and click OK twice. and click . Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . 23 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Place Mass. select the three arc domes. click Modify. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 21 In the drawing area.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 14 In the drawing area. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 20 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property.

and click OK. TIP To find the correct shapes. 30 On the View menu. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. and watch the status bar. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. clear Sloped. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 32 Click the value for Design Option. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. click . 29 In the Project Browser.24 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. click . 27 On the Design Options toolbar. While pressing CTRL. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . select Curved. under Views (all). and click Wireframe. click Visibility/Graphics. select Curved from the Design Option menu.

you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. In this exercise. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 36 On the File menu. click . you pick massing faces to create walls. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 35 Close the warning that displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson.rvt. you placed mass elements into Design Options. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . under Option. select Curved and. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. and click Close. click Make Primary. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click Training Files. you can make it the primary option. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.

click Wall by Face. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 8 In the Project Browser. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing . double-click Level 3. click Orient ➤ Southeast. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar.Brick on CMU. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Wall by Face. 6 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the View menu. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click to show the massing model. click . 5 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Exterior . under Views (all).

12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 16 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. double-click Level 5.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans.

click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. and click Wireframe. In this exercise. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 19 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create floors. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing .You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 20 On the View Control Bar. If desired. under Views (all). Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 9. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click . you can select the overlapping curtain wall.

double-click {3D}. 4 Click OK. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. 2 On the View menu. click Floor Area Faces. under Views (all).Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. and Walls. and click OK. Curtain Systems. 3 On the Model Categories tab. select all levels. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser.

12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 9 On the View menu. 11 On the Options Bar. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing .8 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. 10 Press CTRL. click Modify. click Floor Area Faces.

Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Press CTRL. select Level 1. and click OK. click Floor Area Faces. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. click Modify. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click . click Create Floors. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. click Floor by Face. 20 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Options.13 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 23 On the View toolbar.

you pick massing faces to create roofs. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. under Schedules/Quantities. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. In this exercise. double-click Mass Schedule. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.24 In the Project Browser. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.

Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. click Create Roof. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. select Basic Roof : Generic . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. click Create Roof. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.400mm. 4 In the Type Selector. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.

select Curtain Panels. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.Your model should now look as shown. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. Curtain Systems. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. and Walls. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and then click OK. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing .

Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 5 Press CTRL. click Curtain System by Face. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . 3 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. click Create System.

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass.

9 On the Options Bar. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. In this exercise. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Create System. 10 Click Modify to exit the command.

1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Next. and then click OK.rvt. under Views (all). Floors. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click OK. enter 30000 for Width. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . Roofs. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . clear Curtain Panels.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. click Visibility/Graphics. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and click OK. Curtain Systems. 2 On the View menu. and Walls. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate.

click Modify. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. clear Exclude Options. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 . 11 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.

16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. 17 On the Options Bar. In the next steps.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. click . press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. you want to select the smaller one. click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. Also. double-click Level 1. 19 On the View toolbar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Floor Plans. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Views (all). 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click Remake. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. TIP To select the curtain wall.

click Remake. 20 Select the roof as shown. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 21 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 .

Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.rvt. In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. and click Remake. 1 Open the 3D view.

9 Select Mass.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Massing only. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 5 On the View menu. click All to select all categories. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click on the 3D view. 4 Rename the view 3D . and click OK. 8 Click None to clear the selection.

This concludes the massing tutorial. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing . you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. If desired. to the building shell.In this exercise. You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof.

and modify repetitive units. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. all instances in the building model are updated. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you also simplify the modification process. By grouping objects. 845 . Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. You can also nest groups within other groups. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. In this tutorial. place. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. or with those working on a different project. you not only simplify their placement. For example. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen.

and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. When you make changes to a nested group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise.rvt. hotel rooms. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. click Training Files. You mirror one instance of the group. and typical office layouts. and double-click First Floor. After you create a model group. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. the host group is also updated automatically.Creating. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. In another exercise. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Modifying.

click (Group). Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen.2 Enter ZR.

select the center control for the group origin. Zoom flyout.The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 8 On the View toolbar. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Modify.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. right-click Typical Kitchen. under Groups. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. expand Model.

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . click (Rotate).

click Zoom To Fit. 21 On the Zoom flyout. 20 On the Design Bar. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Modify.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. and one rotated. one mirrored.rvt.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. Modifying a Group | 853 . as shown. When you finish editing. and click Save. Modifying a Group In this exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save As. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

select the element. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click to select it. and click to select the door. 3 Click (Exclude group member). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the wall. press TAB. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. (Include group member). press TAB to highlight the wall. 7 Click (Exclude group member).2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. press TAB. 5 Click (Exclude group member).

clear Tag on Placement. Modifying a Group | 855 . 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Modify. click Door. 13 On the Design Bar. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance.127mm. 10 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 12 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . 15 On the Options Bar.8 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Modify. click Wall. move the cursor to the left.

and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening.17 On the Design Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. click Modify. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 18 On the View toolbar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. Zoom flyout. click Edit Group. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. click Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 21 On the Options Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. move the cursor up. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. In edit group mode.

and click OK. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 29 In the group editor toolbar. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans. enter 1000. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Nesting Groups | 857 . which acts as the host. click Modify.rvt. in the Project Browser. 28 For Base Offset. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. and on the Options Bar. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. for Unconnected Height. created in an earlier lesson. double-click First Floor. 26 Select the opening. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. enter 2134.25 On the Design Bar. click Properties. you add the Typical Kitchen group. click Finish. under Constraints.

4 In the group editor toolbar. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click (Add to Group). 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. select the Typical Kitchen group.2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area.

and filled regions. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to a group. and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. In the next exercise. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. such as text. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 In the Project Browser. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. such as door and window tags. select the wall between the folding doors. 7 In the group editor toolbar. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. click Finish.

rvt. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 4 On the Options Bar. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . under Floor Plans. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click to draw a rectangular region. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. double-click First Floor. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.

10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and on the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Text. Creating a Detail Group | 861 . click to add an arc leader. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Enter Tile. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

expand Detail. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. as shown. and click OK.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 20 In the Project Browser. and select the note and the filled region. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . double-click Second Floor. 16 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. under Groups. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click (Group). 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and click Create Instance. 14 On the Edit toolbar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 18 On the Design Bar.

21 In the drawing area. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click First Floor.rvt. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. under Floor Plans. clear Leader. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. click to place the detail group. click Zoom To Fit. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click (Group). as shown: 5 On the Design Bar.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click (Filter Selection). click Check None. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. and click OK. click Modify. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Filter dialog. select Door Tags. 7 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. therefore. double-click Second Floor. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. for Attached Detail Group Name. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . click Place Detail. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.

click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 5 In the New Project dialog. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. and click Open.16 On the Design Bar. and click Save. under Groups\Model. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. verify that Project is selected. browse to the Desktop. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). click New ➤ Project. click Desktop. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. for Create new. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. click OK. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. select 2 Bedroom Unit. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. accept the default template file. verify that Same as group name is selected. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. In this case. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.rvt. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 3 For File name. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click Save Group.

15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. and click Create Instance. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. When a group is converted to a link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used.rvt. 12 On the Design Bar.A warning dialog is displayed. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. click Training Files. click Use Existing. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click Link. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. and expand Model. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.

868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 20 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project.17 On the Design Bar. and the link is removed. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. and click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Modify. click Remove Link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Bind. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click OK. 23 In the confirmation dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. select the linked Revit model. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. expand Revit Links. 24 In the message dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project.

Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project. 869 .

right-click in the Design Bar. click Toposurface. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. click Point.Using Site Tools In this lesson. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Site. islands. click Training Files. and then modify the data. You add property lines manually. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans.rvt. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . This project file was created using the default metric template. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. 4 On the Options Bar. and walkways. Using the first method. convert the data to a table. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a toposurface using two different methods. and open Metric\m_First_Project. In the final exercises. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you add a building pad to the site. and click Site. In the second part of this exercise.

7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Use the following illustration as a reference. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 871 .

12 On the Settings menu. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . enter 1500 mm.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. under Additional Contours. and click OK. 15000 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. Use the following illustration as a reference. under Increment. click Site Settings. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 12000 mm.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER. Before importing the contour data. click Model Graphics Style. click Yes. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. enter 1000 mm. and press ENTER. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. on the Standard toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . rename the level Basement. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. click . 21 Click the Level 2 text. 18 In the Project Browser. click to delete it. click the elevation value.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. under Views (all). 14 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. 23 Click the Level 1 text. modify the level names and elevations. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the View Control Bar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Modify. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and double-click South.

click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 30 On the Edit menu. it is considered an import symbol. double-click Site. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Until it is exploded. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Modify. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. under Views (all). Under Layer/Level Colors. select Preserve colors. click Pin Position. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 29 Select the imported topography. Click Open. 25 On the File menu. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark.24 In the Project Browser. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. click Modify. Under Import or Link. click Training Files. 31 On the Design Bar. and click OK. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 28 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

34 Under Visibility. When you select the import symbol. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . and click OK. and then click OK. clear C_INDX. click Toposurface. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 32 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. select it. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear Elevations. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. when the edges highlight. 36 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

Using the second method. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. and click Save. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Using the first method. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 42 On the View toolbar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Save As. 39 On the Design Bar. name the project Site-in progress. 40 On the View toolbar. 43 On the File menu. you add property lines using two methods. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. click .rvt. click Finish Surface.

and click OK. add an arc line on the right. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. do so before continuing. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Site-in progress. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Select and delete the right vertical line. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. select Create property lines by sketching. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. double-click Site. Click Modify. under Floor Plans. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Property Line. Adding Property Lines | 877 . On the Design Bar.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Using the 3-point Arc tool. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.

7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. and click OK. click OK. click Finish Sketch. select Edit Table. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. select the lines. click 12 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. 15 Starting in Row #1. when they highlight. 9 In the warning dialog. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog is displayed. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.6 On the Design Bar. click Property Line.

Notice that after you complete the last line. 19 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. click to place the property lines. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click the Imported Categories tab. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.dwg and click OK. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.rfa. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 In the Tags dialog. Adding Property Lines | 879 . 20 Click Load. 23 On the View menu. click Training Files. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 25 Under Visibility. Before adding property line segment tags. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 16 Click OK. This means there is no gap in the property lines. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. If the gap is not closed. click Visibility/Graphics.

NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 30 On the View Control Bar. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. right-click in the Design Bar. you created two sets of property lines. In the final step. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. 31 On the File menu. In this exercise. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. click Tag ➤ By Category. this project file is required in its current state. click Model Graphics Style. 27 On the Options Bar. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. clear Leader. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to place it. The tags display more prominently in this view. click Save. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Drafting. and click Shading with Edges. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. In the next exercise.

specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. enter the name Working Contour.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Under Line Color. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. select Dash dot. select Topography. for Subcategory. Under Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 10 Under Additional Contours. Under Subcategory. select Single Value. click Model Graphics Style. and click OK. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. under Contour Line Display. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 2 On the Settings menu. and click Wireframe. 7 Click OK. Site-in progress.0 mm. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. Under Range Type. select Working Contour. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. select a shade of Brown. click New. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 9 In the Site Settings dialog.rvt. click Site Settings. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . In the Object Styles dialog. enter 1000. click Object Styles.

The next exercise requires a new dataset. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. you create topographic subregions to define roads. In the next exercise. and islands. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 12 On the File menu. Working Contour. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. such as material. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. In this exercise. parking areas. you create subregions in order to define roads. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . you created a new object style subcategory for topography. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. click Close. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. The object style subcategory.11 Click OK.

the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Although the exact dimensions are not important. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Lines.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Subregion. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. try to replicate the location and proportion. 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Site. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.rvt. click Training Files. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 .

you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 9 On the View menu. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Value for Material. click Properties. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 884 | Chapter 23 Site . under Identity Data. enter Parking for Name. click Finish Sketch. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. select Site . When you finish the sketch in a later step. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Shading with Edges.NOTE In the Metric dataset. under Materials and Finishes. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. 6 In the Materials dialog.Tarmacadam for Name.

14 On the Options Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 16 On the Design Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. As you create new subregions. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Edit Boundary. 12 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Delete overlapping lines. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. under Schedules/Quantities.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .Tarmacadam. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Model Graphics Style. and double-click Topography Schedule. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Site. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. they display within this schedule. under Floor Plans. and click Hidden Line. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Notice that the project area has increased. click Finish Sketch. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. expand Schedules/Quantities.

and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. enter Island . click Finish Sketch. click Lines. In this training project.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. and click Shading with Edges. under Schedules/Quantities. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 29 On the View Control Bar. under Identity Data. click the Value for Material.Grass for Name. and click Hidden Line. 23 In the upper-right parking area. 30 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. click Properties. Within each subregion. 26 In the Materials dialog. 20 On the View Control Bar. select Site .Grass for Name. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 24 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Materials and Finishes. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. click Model Graphics Style. and click OK. click Subregion.

Using the techniques learned in previous steps. You must sketch each region separately. click Lines.Grass. under Floor Plans. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 .walkway. 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. and apply the material Concrete . Name each region Island . 34 On the Design Bar.31 In the Project Browser. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.Grass. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . 35 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Name the subregion Walkway. click Subregion.

37 On the Design Bar. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. under Schedules/Quantities. click Save As. 38 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. 888 | Chapter 23 Site . click Finish Sketch. 39 On the File menu. double-click Topography Schedule. there is still only one toposurface.

“Using Phasing” on page 992.rvt. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. 2 Select the toposurface. and click Save. When you use the grading tool. and click OK. select Existing for Phase Created.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. A warning dialog is displayed. click . see the tutorial. under Phasing. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Grading the Toposurface | 889 .

and click Select and Edit. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. select Copy Internal Points. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. click Graded Region.6 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the topographic surface. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 890 | Chapter 23 Site .

10 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. 13 Press DELETE. demolished. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. and new. and click Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . click Model Graphics Style. 11 On the View Control Bar.

The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Finish Surface. 20 On the View toolbar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 18 On the View toolbar. click . click Model Graphics Style.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 19 On the View Control Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 17 On the Design Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point. click . specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 15 On the Options Bar. 892 | Chapter 23 Site .

and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. under Phasing. specify Existing for Phase. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the File menu.rvt. under Phasing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Only the graded topography displays. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. you can delete it. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. click View Properties. Site tutorial-in progress. When you add a building pad. and delete it. 23 Select the toposurface. this project file is required in its current state.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. only the original toposurface displays. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 24 On the View menu. specify New Construction for Phase. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Therefore. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. click View Properties. you create a building pad. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element.

2 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. NOTE By default. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Pad. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. If you have an existing building model. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. under Floor Plans. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . click Lines. the Pick Walls command is active. click Model Graphics Style.

6 On the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. click 9 On the View toolbar. click building pad. click Model Graphics Style. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. . click Save. . 7 On the View Control Bar. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. click Finish Sketch. this project file is required in its current state. 8 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Site Components In this exercise. and click Shading with Edges. Adding Site Components | 895 . you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. Site tutorial-in progress.90 deg. 3 In the Type Selector. and select the parking space. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . click Parking Component. under Floor Plans. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click Site.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. 8 On the View toolbar. click 9 On the View toolbar. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. . double-click Site.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click Site Component. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Site Components | 897 . TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. . click parking spaces.

14 On the View toolbar. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.12 In the Type Selector. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . choose any tree type. click . 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.

click Save. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click . click Tag All Not Tagged. under Floor Plans. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 16 On the File menu.15 On the View toolbar. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously.rvt. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . this project file is required in its current state. Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

and click Apply. In the following exercise. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Under Available fields. click Hidden Line. click Apply. Site tutorial-in progress.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Mark.rvt. click the Fields tab. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. you create a parking schedule. 5 On the View menu. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. and click OK. 7 On the File menu. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Save. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. and click Add. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. select Parking for Category. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

15 On the File menu. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Type. 11 On the Window menu. click Save. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. enter Space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . 7 Under Fields.5 Under Available fields. select Mark. 9 On the Window menu. under Space. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. and under Heading. and click Add. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. The parking schedule is displayed. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. enter Size. click Tile. click Close Hidden Windows. 8 Under Fields. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. If necessary. under Views (all). 12 In the Site plan. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. under Space. select Type. 13 In the Parking Schedule. double-click Site. and under Heading. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Parking Schedule. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. number the first three spaces consecutively.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

You begin by adding the structural walls. In the final lesson. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. 903 . you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton. After completing level 1.Structural 24 In this tutorial. and beams to Level 1. columns.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. click Training Files. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls.rvt. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. under Floor Plans. If necessary. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open.dwg. under Views (all). 2 On the File menu. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Structural. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. under Import or Link. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. and double-click Level 2. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . go to the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

7 Click Open. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. This file is used in the next exercise. After you trace the walls.rvt. to trace the initial set of structural walls.■ ■ Select Current view only. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . In this exercise. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. 6 Under Positioning. and select Origin to origin. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. Select All for Layers. click Save As. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. select Automatically place. Structural_tutorial. 8 On the File menu. select Invert colors. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. you imported a DWG file.

you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. Click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. First. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. rather than the height. In addition. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. In the steps that follow. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Structural Wall.200mm. 5 In the Type Selector. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. and click to specify the wall endpoint.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. 6 On the Options Bar. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural .

and click to specify the next wall endpoint. and click the next line intersection. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to complete the chain of walls. 13 On the View toolbar. click Modify to finish the sketch. click . 10 Move the curser to the right. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 .9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left.

■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. click Structural Wall. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. On the Options Bar. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. in the View toolbar.TIP If necessary. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 17 Using the bulleted steps below. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration.

Click to create a three-point arc.18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. click Modify to end the wall chain. 26 On the Options Bar. click . click Structural Wall. click Visibility/Graphics. 23 Under Visibility. click the Imported Categories tab. 21 On the View menu. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.200mm. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. clear m_Wall_Import. select Basic Wall: Generic . under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. 25 In the Type Selector. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 .dwg and click OK.

click . Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. This is the left extent of the arc. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. This is the right extent of the arc. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall.

click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . 34 Select the horizontal wall. If it is not. and press ENTER. enter 1500.32 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. click Modify. click the value. enter 1500. and press Enter.

Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. you create the final structural walls for the project. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. Both walls are 1200 mm long. In the steps that follow. 36 On the Design Bar. clear Chain.

Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . Structural_tutorial. click Modify. under Views (all). In this exercise. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls.rvt. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. click . 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. You then make minor modifications to their position. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. 40 On the Design Bar. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. In the next exercise. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. This project file is required. Floor Plans. 41 On the View toolbar. 42 On the File menu. in its current state. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. double-click Level 2. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click Save. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown.

and click to place the dimension as shown. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select Entire Walls for Pick. and when it highlights.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you select Entire Walls. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. select it. 6 Move the cursor to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Intersecting Walls. click Modify. the Options button becomes available. click Options to specify the wall pick options. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog.

8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 . 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.

you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. In this exercise. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. joists. click Undo Edit Dimension Length.11 Click the temporary dimension value. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. In the next lesson. several different beam types. 12 On the Edit menu. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. you add structural columns. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. 13 On the File menu. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. in its current state. This project file is required. click Save.

under Floor Plans. click Structural Column. Structural_tutorial. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. TIP When adding the column. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. If necessary. zoom in to place the column. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . In addition. you use the grid intersection tool. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. select Height and specify Level 2.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. and you add a column outside the grids. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. double-click Level 1. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. 2 On the View menu. 4 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

click Grid Intersection. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids.7 Add similar columns to C2. 9 Use a crossing selection. and C5. and A. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural . and select grids 1-5. C3.

Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. Adding Structural Columns | 919 . Columns A3-5 are shown below.TIP To create the crossing selection.

click Grid Intersection. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. click Structural Column. This completes this set of columns. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. click Finish. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR.14 If necessary. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. 20 On the Design Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. Columns B3-5 are shown below. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. click Finish.

“Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. you add beams manually. 26 On the File menu. click Save. As you use the beam tool. you used various methods to add structural columns. you add structural beams to the building model. click Modify. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. click . 25 On the View toolbar. In this exercise.24 On the Design Bar. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. in its current state. This project file is required. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . In the next exercise. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR.

3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . under Floor Plans. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 2 On the View menu. 4 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. Structural_tutorial. click Modify. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. double-click Level 2. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. click Beam. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam.

click Grid. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . For example.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. select Girder for Usage. 14 On the Options Bar. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. 11 On the Options Bar.7. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. Use the following table for other conditions. 10 In the Type Selector. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. and then move the cursor up to grid A. if a beam is joined column-to-column. When you use the grid tool to place beams.

and select grid C. 17 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. click Finish. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. click Beam. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural .16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. enter 8200. 24 Select grid 3. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 23 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 21 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click the temporary dimension value.

25 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. Click column B5 to add the first beam. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. and for Usage. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. select Girder. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5.Notice beams are added between columns. select Chain. In addition. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . 27 Using point-to-point insertion. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. click Finish. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain.

make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. select Girder for Usage. 30 On the Options Bar. to snap only to intersections. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown.28 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . SI. You can also use the shortcut key. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. connecting the column at B4. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder for Usage. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown.

and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. If the W310x32. 34 On the Options Bar. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 33 Select grid A. click Grid.7 beam had crossed grid A.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. 36 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . click Finish. click Grid. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4.

45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. click Beam.37 Select grid B. double-click Level 2. click Finish. 39 On the View toolbar. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. click . 43 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. select Girder for Usage. 44 On the Options Bar. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 38 On the Options Bar. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow.

Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). click Modify. click . Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 .46 Move the cursor to the right. 48 On the View toolbar. 47 On the Design Bar.

and click when it intersects grid 2. for Usage. 52 In the Type Selector. In the steps that follow. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 53 On the Options Bar. select Girder. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. and select Chain. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. click Beam. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region.

56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . and click when it intersects grid 1. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. click . 57 On the View toolbar.

double-click Level 2. you add joists and purlins to the building model. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 2 Zoom around the A1 . 5 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. In this exercise.7. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. 4 In the Type Selector. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. for Usage. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. Structural_tutorial. in its current state. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists.58 On the File menu. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. In the next exercise. you add joists and purlins to the building model.B3 quadrants. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. select Automatic. click Beam. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. You then create a joist array. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. For example. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. This project file is required.

This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps.7 On the Design Bar. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. click on the Options Bar. on the Edit menu. click Array. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . you selected the Automatic option. 9 With the beam selected. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. 11 Click OK. under Structural. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. click Modify.

This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. specify the following: Click . Select 2nd for Move to. Make sure the cursor is over grid A.13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Enter 14 for Number. Once the direction is set. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural .

Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.

Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. click Array. Enter 7 for Number. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. and color within the Object Styles dialog. 20 On the Edit menu.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. joists. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . style. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. and click. Select 2nd for Move to. and purlins. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. specify the following: Click . 21 On the Options Bar.

click . under Other. 25 On the Options Bar. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. 26 In the Filter dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 27 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2.

Click OK. 30 On the View toolbar. you create new levels. This project file is required.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. and notice the connection symbols display. 29 On the Design Bar. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 31 On the File menu. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. In the next lesson. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. in its current state. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. click Save. click . In this exercise. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions.

Defining New Levels In this exercise. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. select Make Plan View. you create several new levels. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. Structural_tutorial. 2 Select grid 1. double-click Building Elevation. under Elevations. Click to add Level 3. You need at least 3 meters of space. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. Defining New Levels | 939 . click Level.

8 On the File menu. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940.In the Project Browser. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. you created three new levels. click . This project file is required.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. Each level is 3000 mm high. These levels that are required in the next exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. in its current state. In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. click Save. Structural_tutorial. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.

Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . 3 On the Edit menu. click OK. under Elevations. select Level 3. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. click Save. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. and select Levels 4 and 5. 8 On the File menu. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. Make sure the entire building model is included. click Copy to Clipboard. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. in its current state. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. In the next lesson. double-click Building Elevation. 7 In the Project Browser. This project file is required.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. In this exercise. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. press and hold CTRL.

You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. and click.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. You can now view the new elevation. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Structural_tutorial. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify. double-click Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. 6 On the Design Bar. Elevation 1-a. in the Project Browser. you create a framing elevation. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. click Framing Elevation. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels.

Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. In the next exercise. This project file is required. Adding Structural Braces | 943 .7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. You are ready to add the structural braces. In this exercise. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. you add structural braces to the building model. in its current state. 8 On the File menu. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. click Save. Structural_tutorial. Notice the stick framing representation. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial.

4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. When adding the braces. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. and using the shape grips.4. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. click Brace. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . select the view crop box. you use point-to-point insertion. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable.

6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. The second brace is displayed. Adding Structural Braces | 945 .The brace displays.

click Modify. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. Select Constrain. specify the following: Click . click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. click Array. Select 2nd for Move to.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. Enter 4 for Number. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 10 On the Edit menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 Select both braces on Level 4.

you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. In this exercise.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 17 On the File menu. click . and click OK. select Structural Framing Tags. click Save. 16 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Braces | 947 .

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

You can enable Worksharing for any project. In this tutorial. floors. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. doors. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. and so on.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. A workset is a collection of building elements. 949 . however. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Using Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. such as walls. they cannot make changes to it. stairs. called Worksharing. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time.

When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you specify an active workset. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you can select which worksets are open or closed. When setting up Worksharing. such as annotations and dimensions. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Working in a shared project In a shared project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. After learning the fundamentals. go to the Worksets dialog. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In the next exercise. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. When you are working on a shared project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. To make a workset editable.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. After the project is shared. select the desired workset. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you must first enable Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Elements specific to a view. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. use Element Borrowing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. The first time you activate worksets within a project. and click Editable. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users.

In a multi-story structure. Shared Levels and Grids. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. On this tab. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. In most projects. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. and View worksets. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. with each assigned a specific functional task. Experience has shown that. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. When creating the new worksets. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. designers work in teams. As new members create worksets for their own use. Team member roles Typically. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. for a typical project. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . each team member has control over a portion of the design. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Instead. not including the Project Standards. Regardless of the default setting. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. such as a tenant interior. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. You should have at least one workset for each person. When you create a new workset. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion.

For example. Generally. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. When finished or at regular intervals. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. however. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. As you work. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . When you save to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. On the Options Bar. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. your changes are saved. proceeds as usual. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. This makes them available to other team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. This is called “Selective Open. you should then save to your local file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Therefore.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. However. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. the file is saved as the central file. within the local file. you make that workset editable by you. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When you save to the central file. you can select which workset is active. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. After saving to the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. if a workset named Interior was created. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. When you save locally (to your local file). Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project.

WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. if you know who checked out the required workset. In this situation. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. and then save the local file. you work no differently then you would in the office. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. To do this. using VPN. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. In this instance. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. When working remotely. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . Alternatively. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. make any required worksets editable.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. In the next exercise. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. for instance. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. In this conceptual exercise. reload the latest changes from the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise.rvt. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. save to the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Worksets. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. and make that workset editable. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you should check out the Materials workset. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable.

Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. clear Families. 4 In the Worksets dialog. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. The Worksets dialog is displayed. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Only User-Created worksets should display. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. another is assigned the interior layout. In this simple training project. For example. imagine four users including yourself.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. a small number of team members are working on the building model. When you enable worksharing. In this case. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. click Worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. ■ 6 Under Show. Your username displays as the present owner. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. and Views. and notice all are editable by you. Therefore. Project Standards. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. For training purposes. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. under Show. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you.

Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 10 Click New. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . type the name Exterior Shell. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. click New. select Interior Layout for Workset. stairs. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. click . 22 On the Options Bar.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. select Workset1. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 24 Select all of the interior elements. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. under Identity Data. click . and click OK. 13 Click Rename. Because the interior walls appear in many views. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 9 Click OK. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. however. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 17 In the drawing area. 21 Select one of the interior walls. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. under Identity Data. and walls. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. expand Floor Plans. it is better to make them visible by default. expand Views (all). 18 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Worksets dialog. 20 Click OK. In this training file. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. currently named Workset1. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Level 1. you can rename the default workset. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. You do. 14 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 15 In the Worksets dialog. including the interior doors. clear Visible by default in all views. When you initially activate Worksharing. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser.

click . under Identity Data. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 30 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 31 On the View menu. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. If any interior elements remain. 25 On the Options Bar. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click the Worksets tab. 27 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. click the Worksets tab. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

40 Click Save. select Interior Layout for Workset. check out worksets. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 45 On the File menu. select Specify. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. 43 On the right side of the dialog. 35 In the drawing area. click Worksets. 3 Click Open. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. make modifications to the building model. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. click Open. 36 On the Options Bar. click Save As. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. click Close. In addition. and click OK. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. under Identity Data. select all of the interior elements of the building model. and click OK. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. under Views (all). make sure you remember the location of this central file. 42 In the Worksets dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 44 Click OK. under Open Worksets. click . This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. In this exercise. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 39 In the Save As dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. please do so before continuing. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 34 In the Project Browser. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Non Editable. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. you create your local file.33 Select Interior Layout. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. double-click Level 2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. select the central file and. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Now that you have created the central file. 2 In the Open dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.

Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Save As. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. expand Floor Plans. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 5 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. expand Views (all). and select Yes for Editable. click Worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Verify that it is cleared. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. select Interior Layout. click Options. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 12 On the Window menu. click Modify. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. If this is selected. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. On the Options Bar. 6 In the Save As dialog. select Interior Layout for Name. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. Before working on the model. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 10 In the Worksets dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. Next. notice the Editable Only option. and click OK. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. click . 17 On the Options Bar. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. and click Save. 11 Click OK. and click OK. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. In this case.

In this case. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 25 Delete the door. Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 21 Click OK. and click OK. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. select Basic Wall: Interior . Because this element is not owned by another user. 20 On the Options Bar. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes.18 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). If it was owned by another user. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall. The precise location is not important. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. you can still edit this wall. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 19 Under Constraints. 22 On the File menu. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Worksets. 28 In the Type Selector. 23 Click OK. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click . under Identity Data. however. In the Worksets dialog. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable.

34 Using the following illustration as a guide. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. you should perform regular saves. save to central. add two door openings into the rooms you created. displays the workset as well as the element type. At the end of a work session. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. a tooltip. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Whenever you save. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. and save locally immediately afterward. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . When working in your local file. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously.30 On the Design Bar. click Door. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. Borrowed Elements is selected. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. which matches the information in the Status Bar. 36 In the Save to Central dialog. you should relinquish all worksets. 33 In the Type Selector. it is recommended. click Modify. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. In addition. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. click Save to Central. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. By default. In this particular case.

and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and proceed to Creating a local copy. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. select Specify. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. consider that person to be User 1. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.rvt. If you have not yet completed these exercises. and click OK. specifically sequenced. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Open. leave this file open in its current state. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. you created your local file. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 . under Username. and click OK. 3 On the Settings menu. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. In the following section of this exercise. For training purposes. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. enter User 2. checked out worksets. In addition. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. In this exercise. under Open Worksets. This is a system setting. 4 Click the General Tab and. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. one user has already created a local file.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. 7 In the Open dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and reload the latest changes. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. skip the following section. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. each user must check out worksets. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. select all the User-Created worksets. You modified the building model. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. click Options. instructions are staggered. two users access the central file through a network connection. User 2: Create a local file. please do so before continuing. 8 Click Open. make elements editable. For training purposes. Throughout the process. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. select the central file and. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. return to the Settings dialog. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central.

name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and double-click Level 1.” 28 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. expand Views (all). expand Views (all). Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 16 Click OK.10 On the File menu. it becomes the active workset. 18 On the File menu. modify the building model. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. click Options. open it now. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. User 1: Check out worksets. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 23 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . This file is for your use only. 11 In the Save As dialog. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Save As. click Save to Central. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. If you only have one workset checked out. and click OK. click Worksets. and click Save. You are now the owner of that workset. You now have a local copy of the project. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. click Worksets. 26 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. If it is not open. 14 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and double-click Level 1. 22 Click OK.

” 38 Click OK. under Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. Before adding any furniture. When you save to central. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. click Component. 41 Select Furniture Layout. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. right-click Copy of Level 1. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 32 On the File menu. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 44 In the Rename View dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 42 On the Project Browser. and click OK. 43 On the Project Browser. 40 On the File menu. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. under Floor Plans. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. under Views (all). click Worksets. Click Yes. User 1: Reload latest worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. you should create a furniture plan view. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. However. and click Rename. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 36 On the File menu.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 45 On the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. click Save to Central. The changes User 2 made are apparent.” 34 Click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. and click Duplicate. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. select the lower exterior wall. right-click Level 1.

52 On the File menu. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. 59 In the Rename dialog. rather than Families. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. 64 Click OK. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click Edit/New. choose any desk. NOTE System families. click Modify. click Worksets. enter Exterior Wall . click Visibility/Graphics. and click inside any room. leave this file open in its current state. are placed under Project Standards. Therefore. click the Worksets tab. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. and click OK. and click OK. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. the Visible by default option was not selected. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. such as Wall Types. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. 65 On the File menu. 48 On the Design Bar. under Show. 49 On the View menu. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click Rename. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. 62 In the Worksets dialog. select Project Standards.” 54 Click OK. 61 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 60 Click OK 3 times. 57 In the Element Properties dialog.200mm. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. and click Properties.47 In the Type Selector. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Save to Central.

modified the building model. 5 Click Save. select Make this a Central File after save. 3 In the Save As dialog. click Options. Each user must have network access to the central file.rvt. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Save As. and these problems are rectified. and click OK. In subsequent steps. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. select Save to Central. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. you save the dataset as a central file. 69 On the File menu. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).User 1: Reload latest. select Reload Latest. click Training Files. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. At the appropriate point in this exercise. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise requires two users and. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. In the final exercise of this tutorial. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. select the following. and click OK. and still have your local files open. and save 68 On the File menu. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. and published their changes back to the central file. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Checking out worksets. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. you need to set up your central and local files. There are specific instructions for each user. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. throughout this training. leave this file open in its current state. finished the previous workset exercises. Each user checked out worksets. As each of you work.

7 On the File menu. 23 In the Worksets dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. click Options. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 9 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Save As. and click Save. select Specify. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Open. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 10 In the File Save Options dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Save As. Set the Username to User 2. click Options. In addition. 14 In the Open dialog. if any User-Created worksets are not open. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. and click OK. click Options. Next. 13 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 17 On the File menu. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. and click OK. select them. select the central file and under Open Worksets. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. The central file should still be open. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. Afterwards. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 15 Click Open. This is the local file for User 1. On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. click Worksets. and click OK. the user that saved the central file should be User 1.

28 Under Active Workset. and click Editing Requests. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. select the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 31 On the left exterior wall.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and then click OK. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 30 On the Options Bar. After you submit the request. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. and select Yes for Editable. verify that Editable Only is cleared. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. 25 Under Active Workset. under Floor Plans. You are now the owner of that workset. At this point. select Interior Layout. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. click the File menu. and then click OK. select Exterior Shell. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to